Home

User manual FL SWITCH MM HS UM E for

1. LNK MODE LNK MODE LNK MODE LNKMODE PHCENIX ACT 100 FD imo 1m imo imo CONTACT 2mm 2mm 2 MODE 1 2 x4 FL SWITCH MM HS Ord No 28 32 326 ES UH 7 H 3 Reset E A Mes 00A0451BDD id HO semen uc 5 3 ee A 6 O 8 09 0 9 O O amp 9 O N A ir 68740008 Figure 2 21 Switch on a grounded DIN rail 6874 en 16 PHOENIX CONTACT 2 13 FL SWITCH HS 2 14 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 16 Startup and functions 3 Startup and functions 3 1 Basic settings The basic Ethernet functions do not have to be configured and are available when the supply voltage is switched on 3 1 1 Default upon delivery default settings By default upon delivery or after the system is reset to the default settings the following functions and properties are available password is private All IP parameters are deleted The switch has no valid
2. UE RX RX ym TX Max 300 m TX HCS fiber RX Mx eae MP Max 50m Polymer fiber Yi N 4 687409061 FL IF 2POF SCRJ D FL IF 2POF SCRJ D FL IF 2POF SCRJ D Figure 3 20 Fiber optic connection between devices The maximum length of the fiber optic cables depends on the interface module fiber type used 3 3 10 5 SCRJ modules in WBM Very detailed information about the SCRJ modules is available in WBM see Section Port Table menu on page 4 29 e g the port system reserve alarms or port states are displayed 6874 en 16 PHOENIX CONTACT 3 29 Product designation The following states can be displayed under Transceiver status System Hardware does not support diagnosable POF modules this hardware does not support POF SCRJ diagnostics POF SCRJ Interface modules present no POF SCRJ module is plugged in POF SCRU Interface module is present and OK the system reserve is greater than 2 dB and is displayed under RX system reserve POF SCRU Interface module is present but the system reserve is low the system reserve is less than 2 dB but greater than O dB POF SCRJ Interface module is present but the system reserve is exhausted no system reserve available t
3. IP SLI 4 Max 36000 m FA Single mode E AC Re glass fiber RX 4 TX TX RX e 10000 m nx RX RX Multi mode glass fiber NIX 4 TX TX 4 N 4 4 6874102 NL FL IF 2FX SC F FL IF 2FX SC F FL IF 2FX SM SC F FL IF 2FX SM SC F Figure 3 15 Fiber optic connection between devices The maximum length of the fiber optic cables depends on the interface module fiber type used 3 18 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 16 Startup and functions M 3 3 5 FL IF 2FX ST D NOTE Please observe the following information on the FL IF 2FX D Interface modules Affected Interface modules FL IF 2FX SC D HW 05 FL IF 2FX SM SC D HW 03 FL IF 2FX ST D HW 01 The use of the above named Interface modules with the specified hardware status is restricted the FL SWITCH MM HS modular managed switch Order no 2832328 and the FL MXT 2832331 extension stations It is only possible to operate one of the above mentioned modules in the head station of the switch and one each in an extension station An FL SWITCH MMS can be operated with two extension stations i e a maximum of 3 FL IF 2FX D modules All other IF modules can be operated in a
4. Receiver Receiver Receiver Receiver Figure 7 3 Configuration example Possible redundant paths must be taken into consideration when using Rapid Spanning Tree for multicast group creation 7 6 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874_en_16 Multicast filtering IGMP on Layer 3 Query IGMP snooping D 7 4 Dynamic multicast groups 7 4 1 Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP NOTE If IGMP Snooping is activated the connection to other switches is only by the use of ports 1 8 possible The Internet Group Management Protocol describes a method for distributing information via multicast applications between routers and termination devices at IP level Layer 3 When starting a multicast application a network device transmits an IGMP membership report and thus informs its members of a specific multicast group A router collects these membership reports and thus maintains the multicast groups of its subnetwork At regular intervals the router sends IGMP queries This causes the devices with multicast receiver applications to send a membership report again The IGMP Query function only transmits in the management VLAN and only stops if there is a better querier in the management VLAN The router enters the IP multicast group address from the report message in its routing table This means that frames with this IP multic
5. 705600107 Figure 5 20 Example 2 for the relevant path 5 2 5 10 Reconfiguration times The reconfiguration time for a Spanning Tree depends on the timer values for MaxAge and Forward Delay The minimum reconfiguration time is 2 x Forward Delay The maximum reconfiguration time is 2 x Forward Delay MaxAge For the values recommended by the IEEE standard the value for ten active STP switches along a path beginning with the root switch is between 30 s and 50 s Switch over time response to be expected for RSTP and RSTP with activated ring detection When using RSTP expect switch over times in the range from 100 ms to 2 s When using fast ring detection expect switch over times in the range from 100 ms to 500 ms Port roles The root port of a switch connects this switch to the root switch either directly or via another switch designated switch The designated port is the port at a designated switch that is connected to the root port of the next switch No additional switches bridges are connected to edge ports Termination devices are connected to edge ports An alternate port is a path to the root which however did not become a root port l e this port is not part of the active topology 5 26 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 16 Media Redundancy Protocol MRP 6 Media Redundancy Protocol MRP Loops 6 1 General function A ring c
6. 1 2 6 Dimensions of the Modular Managed Switch System for GL certified operation l 468 341 214 sls 127 s 127 ooo E EE CONTACT 2 B L M 5 3 6 9 col 9 Pox 5 b cn 5 ba bc 5 zi 5 5 5 ej NA A 9 e A 114 5 pini o Lo LO Lo 5 vt E NS 68740049 Figure 1 8 MMS housing dimensions in millimeters 1 2 7 Assignment of ports to slots 22 io mm mo mo mm imo mo mo mm uin UE imm Port Port Port Port Port Port Port Port Port Port oT 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 051 GND US2 GND Ri R2 2 4 1 12 14 1 1 2 22 24 E 6 8 0 6 8 0 68740028 Figure 1 9 Assignment of ports to slots 6874_en_16 PHOENIX CONTACT 1 11 FL SWITCH HS 1 3 Status and diagnostic indicators 1 3 1 LEDs on the switch and the MMS extension module Des Color Status Meaning US1 Green ON Supply voltage 1 in the tolerance range OFF Supply voltage 1 too low US2 Green ON Supply voltage 2 in the tolerance range OFF Supply voltage 2 too low FAIL Red ON Alarm contact open i e an error has occu
7. MRP General MRP Operating Mode MRP Client MRC Manager License Missing Ring Status Info Client doesnt know System Up Time 0 days 0 hours 24 minutes 31 seconds Last Status Change days 0 hours 0 minutes seconds Status Change Counter Primary Ring Port Port 6 Status Forwarding Sec Ring Port Port 5 Status Link Down Note This web page will be refreshed in 28 sec automatically change the interval at the web page Device Configuration User Interfaces Figure 6 5 MRP General web page for an MRP client 6 4 2 MRP Configuration The MRP Configuration web page is used to configure the protocol parameters The following configuration parameters are displayed Device Role Disabled MRP Client or MRP Manager Selection of the ring ports that are integrated in the MRP ring Selection of the VLAN ID for tagging mode MRP Configuration Disabled Device Role C Client 6 Manager Ring Ports 5 6 To activate the MRP Manager a FL IF MRM 2891770 with license key is necessary See the Memory Module webpage Removing a license will cause a disabled MRP after next startup The selected ring ports will be removed automatically from the RSTP domain MRP Domain Vlan ID 3000 Vien 3000 For detailed information about the configured vlans see web page Switch Station Vian Current Vians Enter password Figure 6 6 MRP Con
8. organized in MIBs 9 t E d 1 55 55 55 B c zem MBAS 3 E A A 687407022 Figure 4 48 Diagram of SNMP 6874 en 16 PHOENIX CONTACT 4 45 FL SWITCH MM HS 4 3 2 1 Tree structure of the MIB 1 iso 0 std 3 org 8802 1508802 6 ap 1 ieee802dot1 1 internet I 1 ieee802dot1mibs I 2 4 private 6 snmpV2 SS 1 enterprises 3 snmpModules 1 system 2 interfaces 3 address translation 4ip 5 icmp 6 tcp 7 udp 8 egp 10 transmission 11 snmp 16 rmon 17 dotidBridge 30 ianaifType 31 ifMib Figure 4 49 ae ees 4346 phoenixContact 1 snmpMIB 6146 029 5 security Tree structure of the MIB Notall devices support all object classes If an unsupported object class is requested not supported is generated If an attempt is made to modify an unsupported object class the message badValue is generated 4 46 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 16 Configuration and diagnostics OID Syntax Access Description OID Syntax Access Description OID Syntax
9. 4 111 FL SWITCH HS Syntax Integer 0 65535 Access Read Description Displays the priority of this MRP device if itis an MRP manager fIWorkFWCtrlMRPInfoDomainRingPort1 OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 10 2 1 1 7 Syntax Integer Access Read and write Description Displays the iflndex of the first MRP ring port of this switch flWorkFWCtrIMRPInfoDomainRingPort1 State OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 10 2 1 1 8 Syntax Integer Access Read Description Displays the status of the first MRP ring port of this switch Disabled 1 Blocking 2 Forwarding 3 flWorkFWCtrIMRPInfoDomainRingPort2 OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 10 2 1 1 9 Syntax Integer Access Read and write Description Displays the iflndex of the second MRP ring port of this switch flWorkFWCtrIMRPInfoDomainRingPort2State OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 10 2 1 1 10 Syntax Integer Access Read Description Displays the status of the second MRP ring port of this switch Disabled 1 Blocking 2 Forwarding 3 flWorkFWCtrIMRPInfoDomainState OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 10 2 1 1 11 Syntax Integer Access Read Description Specifies the operational state of this MRP ring MRP deactivated 0 Client 1 ring closed 2 MRP ring open 3 fIWorkFWCtrlMRPInfoDomainError OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 10 1 1 1 12 Syntax Integer 4 112 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 16 Configuration and diagnostics Access Description Read Specifies the r
10. Figure 2 12 Mounting the labeling field 2 8 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 16 Mounting and installation 2 5 2 Removal Pullthe expansion plug cap upwards until the entire plug is removed Remove the labeling field 2 5 3 Dimensions of the labeling field 29 mm 1 142 in 15 mm 0 591 in 125 mm 4 921 in Figure 2 13 Dimensions of the labeling field 2 6 FL MEM PLUG accessories FL SWITCH MCS 16 9 11 13 15 2 4 6 10 12 14 16 12345678 BE 9 10 11 12 13 1 15 16 ioo 4 70563004 Figure 2 14 Switch with MEM PLUG inserted As shown in Figure 2 14 insert the FL MEM PLUG memory module in the appropriate M12 female connector on the bottom of the MCS Once inserted carefully turn the safety screw clockwise To remove the MEM PLUG perform the above in reverse order The MEM PLUG can be inserted and removed during operation 6874 en 16 PHOENIXCONTACT 2 9 FL SWITCH MM HS 2 7 Installing the MMS or MCS 2 7 1 Connecting the supply voltage to the MMS MCS The system is operated using a 24 V DC voltage which is applied at the head station or 24 V DC MCS If required the voltage can also be supplied redundantly see Fi
11. Figure 4 41 Power over Ethernet Port Table web page The following states are supported No error Error in the external PoE supply voltage Temperature too high Current limitation activated Load disconnected The PoE controller does not respond 48 V supply may be missing No PoE interface module inserted in this slot The switch does not support PoE interface modules No PoE devices connected to this port Port Power over Ethernet Configuration Ports Port Power over Ethernet Configuration menu 4 34 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874_en_16 Configuration and diagnostics This menu can be used to set the port specific configuration settings for Power over Ethernet The PoE interface module is supported by firmware Version 4 0 or later Firmware Versions 4 0 treat the module as a standard RJ45 interface module The module can operate in PoE mode without management and without support from the firmware and hardware system bus No configuration options or diagnostic data are available The use of the PoE interface module requires the application of system bus firmware 5 00 or later in the head station and system bus firmware 4 00 or later in the extension modules If this requirement is not met in the head station or in any extension module then PoE management is not available in the entire system PoE interface modules can operate without management and without management support No configuration op
12. Enter password Figure 4 34 Port Configuration Table web page Ports Port Configuration menu Offers individual configuration options for each port Even if the port is switched off the Link LED for the port remains active 6874 en 16 PHOENIX CONTACT 4 27 FL SWITCH HS Port Configuration De Type EXT MEM Link State 00000000 Negotiation Mode auto Speed OMB full u Link Monitoring Port Configuration of port 7 General Security PoE R STP VLAN Port Statistics of port 7 General Figure 4 35 Configuration web page 4 28 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 16 Configuration and diagnostics Figure 4 36 Port Statistics Port Number Packets up to 54 Octets 65 to 127 Octets 128 to 255 Octets 256 to 511 Octets 512 to 1023 Octets 1024 to 1518 Octets Broadcast Multicast Octets Fragments Undersized Packets Oversized Packets CRC Alignment Errors Drop Events Jabbers Collisions Clear counters Ports Port Statistics menu This menu provides detailed statistical information about the volume of data for each individual port On this page additional counter states can be set to zero for all ports Bw 124055 42307 76924 3120 828 153 429 1560 51554 10767201 You set the sta
13. Table 3 1 Operating modes in Smart mode Mode ACT 100 FD Display MMS only LED 1 LED 2 LED 3 Exit Smart mode without changes OFF OFF ON 51 Reset to default settings OFF ON OFF S2 Set PROFINET mode OFF ON ON S3 Set Ethernet IP mode ON OFF OFF S4 3 2 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 16 Startup and functions Example When the switch is in Smart mode exiting Smart mode triggers the following action ACT 100 FD ACT 100 FD 1 C MODE MODE Exit without Reset to default changes settings ACT 100 FD ACT 100 FD 2 1 0 PROFINET Ethernet IP Figure 3 1 Example for Smart mode 6874_en_16 PHOENIX CONTACT 3 3 Product designation eC i 3 2 2 Assigning IP parameters When the supply voltage is switched on or the reset button is pressed the switch sends requests BootP requests to assign IP parameters The button must be held down for a few seconds to trigger a reset The BootP function can be deactivated via the management By default upon delivery the BootP function is activated The assignment of valid IP parameters is vital to the management function of the switch If the switch has not received any valid IP parameters 01 or dc appears in the display and one of the mode LEDs ACT 100 or FD flashes Options for assigning IP p
14. 6874 en 16 PHOENIX CONTACT 9 1 FL SWITCH MM HS Operating Mode Default Mod Profinet Mode Profinet Activating the mode Profinet the following settings will be done select ip address assignment DCP enable LLDP clear the default System Name like SWITCH SMCS save the configuration execute a reboot Changing from the mode Profinet to an other mode the following settings will be done independently of the setting before selecting the mode profinet a select ip address assignment BootP replace an empty System Name by the default System Name like FLSWITCHSMCS The settings become effective after saving the configuration and rebooting the device Enter password Figure 9 1 Operating Mode web page Switching to Default When the switch is reset to Default mode from Profinet mode the following settings are mode made LLDP remains active with the values default upon delivery P address assignment is set to BootP Thestation name for the switch does not change If no station name has been specified the device type is entered It is recommended to save the new configuration after changing operating mode Please note that some configuration modifications only take effect after a restart 9 2 Switch as a PROFINET IO device 9 2 1 Configuration in the engineering tool 9 2 1 1 Specifying the bus configuration The switch can be operated as a PROFINET IO device
15. 10 4 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 16 DHCP relay agent 11 DHCP relay agent The MFL SWITCH MM HSMS MCS is able to act as a DHCP relay agent The DHCP relay agent function is required for DHCP option 82 DHCP option 82 is used by the DHCP server when assigning addresses to identify the requesting termination device via the corresponding physical switch port In the event of device replacement DHCP option 82 enables the replacement device to be assigned the same IP address as the replaced device due to the physical position in the network The DHCP packet broadcast originally sent by the termination device also reaches the DHCP server if itis located in the same subnetwork The DHCP server should be set so that it ignores this packet Sequence Every time the MMS MCS receives a DHCP discover request that has been sent by a termination device the MMS MCS extends the DHCP option 82 field and forwards the data packet to the specific DHCP server The desired DHCP server should be configured in WBM on the Relay Agent page The DHCP server can generate a response using option 82 information and can send this to the relay agent The switch then removes the DHCP option 82 data from the DHCP server response and forwards it to the termination device that triggered the request Information in the DHCP option 82 field The MMS MCS extends the VLAN ID in the DHCP option 82 field for the VLAN to which the termination device is assigned and
16. 6874 en 16 PHOENIX CONTACT 3 27 Product designation CM HO 3 3 10 FL IF 2POF SCRJ D NOTE If the FL SWITCH MM HS with two FL MXT extension modules is additionally operated with one FL IF MEM 2TX D memory module and up to four FL IF POF SCRJ D interface modules at the same time the arrangement according to Section Arrangement of the interface modules on page 2 7 must be observed Hot plugging When inserting and removing interface modules you do not have to switch off the supply voltage The interface modules are detected automatically and logged to the network management If the FL IF 2POF SCR interface is removed and another interface type is inserted in its place the ports are set to auto negotiation 3 3 10 1 Default upon delivery When the interface modules are inserted they are preset with a data transmission rate of 100 Mbps and full duplex mode and link monitoring is not activated for the fiber optic ports If a fiber optic interface module is inserted in a MMS that has already been parameterized the existing configuration remains active The data transmission rate is set to 100 Mbps The duplex method is set to full duplex If the module is removed auto negotiation is enabled 3 3 10 2 Functions Line monitoring According to standard IEEE 802 3 the switch monitors the connected fiber optic cables for interrupts Ports that are not being used are consid
17. Ir E z a f oeme 22 CE aga 15 pug wd a 3 INI IT m FESSES 42 a t DET 687410062 LJ um 5 Emm I DRE Figure 6 1 Example ring Make sure that the topology used does not contain an invalid mixture of RSTP and MRP 0 where two of the devices used are also redundantly coupled using an additional RSTP connection 6 2 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 16 Media Redundancy Protocol MRP 6 2 1 1 Example of a permissible network with MRP and R STP 667410063 Figure 6 2 Permissible example of MRP with R STP 6 2 1 2 Example of an impermissible network with MRP and R STP 58 B aJ 687410064 OD000000000000 Impermissible connection Figure 6 3 Impermissible example 6874_en_16 PHOENIX CONTACT 6 3 FL SWITCH MM HS 6 3 Enabling web pages for using MRP in WBM Activate WBM for the switches e g using the Factory Manager Switch to the General Configuration menu then the User Interfaces page Activate Redundancy and conf
18. 7 FL IF 8 FL IF 2PSE FLIF 2POF SCRJ D Example structures Station with 2 FX modules and 2 TX modules 350 mA 1 2 x 200 mA 5 2 x 0 mA 3 750 mA Station with 2 FX modules 5 HCS modules and 1 POF TX module 350 mA 250 mA OmA 100 mA 200 mA 200 mA 60 mA 60 mA 0 mA 30 mA from MMS additional 850 mA maximum from external 48 V PoE supply 200 mA 350 mA 1 250 mA 2 2 x 200 mA 5 5 x 100 mA 4 60 mA 6 1560 mA Station with 5 FX modules 4 HCS modules 2 TX modules and 1 POF TX module 350 mA 1 2 x 250 mA 2 5 x 200 mA 5 4 x 100 mA 4 2 x O mA 3 60 mA 6 2310 mA 12 8 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 16 Technical data and ordering data 12 3 Ordering data 12 3 4 Ordering data MMS NOTE Please observe the following information on the FL IF 2FX D Interface modules Affected Interface modules FL IF 2FX SC D HW 05 FL IF 2FX SM SC D HW 03 FL IF 2FX ST D HW 01 The use of the above named Interface modules with the specified hardware status is restricted the FL SWITCH MM HS modular managed switch Order no 2832328 and the FL MXT 2832331 extension stations It is only possible to operate one of the above mentioned modules in the head station of the switch and one each in an extension station An FL SWITCH MMS can be operated with two extension stations i e a maximum of 3 FL IF 2FX D modules All other
19. MaxAge 2 Hello Time 1 2x Forward Delay 1 s gt MaxAge MaxAge 22 x Hello Time 1 5 The value MaxAge 2 Hello Time for a ring topology corresponds to the maximum number of components with active Spanning Tree Inactive connection 1 Relevant path for setting the timer values gums EL 705600106 Figure 5 19 Example 1 for the relevant path 6874 en 16 PHOENIX CONTACT 5 25 FL SWITCH MM HS Inactive connection unn P nn v Active connection Relevant path for setting the timer values nanaii
20. OID Syntax Access Description OID Syntax Access Description OID Syntax Access Description OID OID OID Syntax Access Description OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 2 1 1 Display string Read Contains the manufacturer s name Phoenix Contact GmbH amp Co KG pxcBasicDescr 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 2 1 2 Display string Read Contains the manufacturer s name and address Phoenix Contact GmbH amp Co KG P O Box 1341 D 32819 Blomberg pxcBasicURL 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 2 1 3 Display string Read Contains the manufacturer s web address http www phoenixcontact com 4 3 12 3 OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 flGlobal 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 1 flBasic 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 1 1 flBasicName 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 1 1 1 Display string Read Contains the name of the product group Factory Line flBasicDescr 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 1 1 2 4 72 6874 16 Configuration and diagnostics Syntax Display string Access Read Description Contains a brief description of the product group Ethernet Installation System flBasicURL OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 1 1 3 Syntax Display string Access Read Description Contains a specific URL for the product group www factoryline de flBasicCompCapacity OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 1 1 4 Syntax Integer32 1 1024 Access Read Description Contains the number of different components that can be managed with this device f
21. Port power over Ethernet Configuration Port Number 2 Module HS Interface x1 Port Name Port 2 PoE Fault State No fault detected Port Power Status Disable Enable Port PoE fault monitoring Disable Enable Current limitation for Class 1 current for class OFF O 1 devices to 90mA Device Class Class 3 Output Voltage 47745 mV Output Current 18 mA Output Power 907 Enter password Configuration of port 7 General Security PoE R STP VLAN Port Statistics of port 2 General Figure 4 42 Port Power over Ethernet Configuration web page Diagnostics Display menu for the MMS 4 36 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874_en_16 Configuration and diagnostics Current display of the 7 segment display and the states of the alarm contact and redundant power supply Display 7 Segment Display Operating Status Firmware is working Online Diagnostics Alarm Contact Note This web page wil be refreshed 14 sec automatically change the interval at the web page Services Status At present no event to trigger the alarm contact is recognized Power Supply Status Power supplies 051 and 052 connected C cd Figure 4 43 Display web page Click on Online Diagnostics to display the current view ofthe diagnostic display in a sm
22. flWorkFWCtrIMRPConfigDomainRingPort2 OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 10 1 1 1 8 Syntax Integer Access Read and write Description Specifies the second MRP ring port of this switch flWorkFWCtrIMRPConfigDomainResetRoundTripDelays OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 10 1 1 1 9 Syntax Integer Access Read and write Description Deletes the minimum maximum values of the round trip delay flWorkFWCtrIMRPInfo flWorkFWCtrIMRPInfoDomainTable flWorkFWCtrIMRPInfoDomainEntry OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 10 2 1 1 fIWorkFWCtrlMRPInfoDomainldx OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 10 2 1 1 1 Syntax Integer Access Read Description Displays the index of the MRP domains flWorkFWCtrIMRPInfoDomainUdid OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 10 2 1 1 2 Syntax Octet string Access Read Description In IEC 61158 5 10 the structure of the UUID is specified as a numerical ID fIWorkFWCtrlMRPInfoDomainName OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 10 2 1 1 3 Syntax Octet string Access Read Description Contains a descriptive name for this MRP ring default MRP domain flWorkFWCtrIMRPInfoDomainRole OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 10 2 1 1 4 Syntax Integer Access Read Description The possible MRP operating modes can be read here MRP not operating 0 MRP operating as client 1 MRP operating as manager 2 fIWorkFWCtrlMRPInfoDomainManagerPriority OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 10 2 1 1 5 6874 16
23. 3 3 3 4 HCS connection between devices When connecting two HCS interface modules note the signal direction of the fiber optics The fiber connection is always from the transmitter to the receiver SERE oz 100 m Figure 3 13 HCS connection 4 5 RX TX RX Max 100 m HCS 4 4 RX TX 3 16 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 16 Startup and functions M 5 3 3 4 FL IF 2FX SC FL IF 2FX SM SC NOTE Please observe the following information on the FL IF 2FX D Interface modules Affected Interface modules FL IF 2FX SC D HW 05 FL IF 2FX SM SC D HW 03 FL IF 2FX ST D HW 01 The use of the above named Interface modules with the specified hardware status is restricted the FL SWITCH MM HS modular managed switch Order no 2832328 and the FL MXT 2832331 extension stations It is only possible to operate one of the above mentioned modules in the head station of the switch and one each in an extension station An FL SWITCH MMS can be operated with two extension stations i e a maximum of 3 FL IF 2FX D modules All other IF modules can be operated in any constellation O
24. D Teilnehmername D D IP Adresse 172 16 27 61 lt IP address 3 subnetzmaske 255 255 0 0 lt Subnet mask 5 Standardgateway 3 Aktualisierungszeit Eing nge 512ms 3 Aktualisierungszeit Ausg nge 512 ms 3 berwachungszeit ms 2000 4 Recommended value 5 Betrieb bei Konfigurationsunterschieden nein DI Oberster Knoten in Ethernet Topologie nein 3 Verbindungszustand protokollieren ja 887407055 Figure 9 3 Device details with modified settings The PROFINET variables can then be created and used in the control program 9 4 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 16 Operating as a PROFINET device In addition to the PNIO DATA STATE standard variables the switch provides the link status as a process data byte for each port If the PNIO DATA VALID bit for the PNIO DATA 5 variables declares the switch process data as valid the process data item for a port can have the following values Value 1 active link Value 2 no active link Value 3 link present but partner cannot establish link only for FX ports Far End Fault Detection Process data can only be accessed if the parameterized desired configuration on device startup corresponds to the actual configuration The Status word and the Control word of the management agent are not used 9 2 3 Configuration via the engineering tool The universal parameter editor UPE can be used to confi
25. Profinet Alarms Power Supply Disable Enable Module Remove Disable C Enable MRP Ring Failure 6 Disable C Enable Link Monitoring Ports 1 8 m Ports 9 16 Ports 17 24 POF SCRJ Diagnostics Ports 1 8 Ports 9 16 Ports 17 24 This settings will not be saved Please use an engineering tool to configure alarms in your application Enter password Apply Figure 9 4 PROFINET alarms in WBM The settings in Profinet Alarms can be saved with the configuration The controller can transmit a different alarm configuration to the switch and therefore overwrite the configuration settings 9 4 Process data communication The following process data is used Management input byte Bytes 01 02 Status word Byte 03 Ethernet port 1 8 Byte 04 Ethernet port 9 16 Byte 05 Ethernet port 17 24 Management output byte Bytes 01 02 Control word Port input byte Byte 01 Port 1 Byte 02 Port 2 Byte 03 Port 3 6874 en 16 PHOENIX CONTACT 9 7 FL SWITCH HS 9 4 1 Control word The control word is a special process data item used to make settings which are not to be executed via a conventional process data item The control word of the management agent can be described with a command consisting of two bytes The device responds to this with the sam
26. Qualified application programmers and software engineers who are familiar with the safety concepts of automation technology and applicable standards Explanation of symbols used and signal words hazards Obey all safety measures that follow this symbol to avoid possible in This is the safety alert symbol It is used to alert you to potential personal injury jury or death There are three different categories of personal injury that are indicated with a signal word DANGER This indicates a hazardous situation which if not avoided will re sult in death or serious injury WARNING This indicates a hazardous situation which if not avoided could result in death or serious injury CAUTION This indicates a hazardous situation which if not avoided could result in minor or moderate injury This symbol together with the signal word NOTE and the accompanying text D alert the reader to a situation which may cause damage or malfunction to the device hardware software or surrounding property This symbol and the accompanying text provide the reader with additional in formation or refer to detailed sources of information How to contact us Up to date information on Phoenix Contact products and our Terms and Conditions can be found on the Internet at www phoenixcontact com Make sure you always use the latest documentation It can be downloaded at www phoenixcontact n tal If there are any problems that cannot be solved usi
27. 17 4 70 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 16 Configuration and diagnostics OID OID 6 4 3 12 Private MIBs The private MIBs for the MMS MCS from Phoenix Contact can be found under object ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 The MMS MCS MIB contains the following groups pxcModules OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 1 pxcGlobal OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 2 pxcFactoryLine OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 All configuration modifications which are to take effect after a MMS MCS restart must be saved permanently using the flWorkFWCtrlConfSave object The aging time default 40 seconds is not set using the private MIBs instead it is set using the dott dTpAgingTime MIB object OID 1 3 6 1 2 1 17 4 2 The available setting range is 10 825 seconds MIB tree The private MIB from Phoenix Contact is integrated in the MIB tree as follows see red arrow MIB tree ind a e cc Eg iso B E UT org dod B E internet directory mgmt H E mib 2 experimental El private 51 28 enterprises E G phoenixContact H pxcModules 8 1 pxcGlobal 8 1 pxcFactorpLine H E snmp 2 0 Figure 4 50 MIB tree 4 3 12 1 pxcModules OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 1 flMSwitchMModule 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 1 8 The object contains information about the manufacturer 4 3 12 2 pxcGlobal OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 2 pxcBasic 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 2 1 pxcBasicName 6874 en 16 PHOENIX CONTACT 4 71 FL SWITCH HS
28. 3600 4 96 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 16 Configuration and diagnostics fIWorkFWCtrlUpdate OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 4 fIWorkFWCtrlTftplpAddr OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 4 2 Syntax IP address Access Read and write Description This object can be used to set the IP address of the TFTP server for the firmware update fIWorkFWCtrITftpFile OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 4 3 Syntax Octet string 0 64 Access Read and write Description This object can be used to set the name of the firmware file for TFTP download fIWorkFWCtrlUpdateStatus OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 4 4 Syntax Integer Access Read Description This object can be used to request the status of the firmware update Update successful 1 Update not successful 2 No update completed 3 Unknown 4 fIWorkFWCtrlUpdateExecute OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 4 5 Syntax Integer Access Read and write Description This object can be used to trigger the firmware update No firmware update 1 Execute firmware update 2 i After a firmware update a reset is required to activate the new firmware 6874 en 16 PHOENIX CONTACT 4 97 FL SWITCH HS flWorkFWCtrlRunningUpdate OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 4 6 Syntax Integer Access Read Description This object can be used to request the status of the firmware update Firmware update not started 1 Executing firmware update 2 Firmware update successful 3 Connection error 4 Incorrect file name
29. OID Syntax Access Description OID Syntax Access Description flSwitch 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 15 flSwitchCtrl 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 15 1 flSwitchCtrlSpanTree 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 15 1 1 Integer Read and write Activates deactivates STP for the switch STP deactivated 1 STP activated 2 To enable STP activation the flSwitchCtrlRedundancy object must be set to STP flSwitchCirlRedundancy 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 15 1 2 Integer Read and write Displays the selected redundancy mechanism for the switch If No redundancy is se lected all redundancy mechanisms and the corresponding web pages are disabled If RSTP is activated the web pages for RSTP are enabled No redundancy 1 RSTP activated 2 i For STP configuration the Bridge MIB is used see page 4 61 flSwitchCtrlMulticast 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 15 1 3 Integer Read and write Indicates whether the web pages required for multicast operation are displayed Hide web pages Show web pages 2 4 114 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 16 Configuration and diagnostics flSwitchCtrlIVLAN OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 15 1 4 Syntax Integer Access Read and write Description Indicates whether the web pages required for VLAN configuration are enabled VLAN web pages hidden 1 VLAN web pages shown 2 flSwitchCtrIVLANTagMode OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 15 1 5 Syntax Integer Access Read and write Description In Tr
30. Structure of the Telnet interface screens 4 130 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874_en_16 Configuration and diagnostics 4 Login screen Login Screen gt Phoenix Contact Modular Managed Switch System lt Phoenix Contact GmbH amp Co KG www phoenixcontact com Running switch application version X XX Password 68740010 Figure 4 61 User interface login screen The login screen indicates the version of the firmware used A password must be entered to make other settings By default upon delivery the password is private Itis case sensitive We strongly recommend that you change the password Basic switch configuration Basic Switch Configuration MAC Address IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway IP Parameter Assignment K K KK K Rapid Spanning Tree Current Vlan Status Vlan Mode Port Security Access Control for Web Switch Operating Mode Web Interface Telnet Interface SNMP Interface Reset LOGOUT APPLY SAVE Enter Agent IP Address in decimal dot format e g Figure 4 62 FL SWITCH 00 80 45 03 5 41 00 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 lt BootP gt lt Redundancy WEB menus OFF RSTP OFF gt Transparent lt VLAN Transparent gt lt Disable gt lt Disable gt lt Default gt lt Enable gt lt Enable gt lt Enable gt lt No res
31. Transmission length including 3 dB system reserve Average dynamic transmission power fiber type in link mode Minimum Average dynamic receiver sensitivity fiber type in link mode Minimum Optical overrange Ethernet interfaces SCRJ with optical diagnostics Number Connection format Data transmission rate Wavelength Laser protection Minimum cable length Transmission length including 3 dB system reserve Average dynamic transmission power fiber type in link mode Minimum Average dynamic receiver sensitivity fiber type in link mode Minimum Optical overrange Cable lengths Twisted pair Polymer fiber POF HCS Glass fiber 1300 nm multi mode Glass fiber 1800 nm single mode 8 0 dBm 980 1000 Reduced by 12 dBm 980 1000 via switch 23 0 dBm 980 1000 um 11 5 dBm 980 1000 um 2 F SMA female connectors on the interface module 100 Mbps 650 nm 100 m HCS fiber with F S 200 230 10 dB km 18 dBm 200 230 um 23 0 dBm 200 230 um 11 5 dBm 200 230 um 2 FL IF 2POF SCRJ D SC RJ female connectors on the interface module 100 Mbps 100 Mbps according to PROFINET standard 660 nm Class 1 according to DIN EN 60825 1 1m 50 m polymer fiber with F K 980 1000 230 dB km at 10 100 Mbps maximum 100 m HCS fiber with F S 200 230 8 dB km at 100 Mbps maximum 8 0 dBm 980 1000 um 23 0 dBm 980 1000 um 1 0 dBm 980 1000 um 100m Depends on the interface module 1
32. fIWorkFWCtrlSerialDataBits 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 6 2 Integer Read Contains the number of data bits in the serial interface 8 bits 1 4 102 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 16 Configuration and diagnostics fIWorkFWCtrlSerialStopBits OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 6 3 Syntax Integer Access Read Description Contains the number of stop bits in the serial interface 1 bit 1 2 bits 2 flWorkFWCtrlSerialParity OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 6 4 Syntax Integer Access Read Description Contains the parity mode for the serial interface None 1 Odd 2 Even 3 fIWorkFWCtrlSerialFlowControl OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 6 5 Syntax Integer Access Read Description Contains the selected flow control for the serial interface None 1 Hardware 2 fIWorkFWCtrlAlarmContact OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 7 flWorkFWCtrlAlarmContactEvents OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 7 1 fIWorkFWCtrlAlarmContactEventPowerSupply OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 7 1 1 Syntax Integer Access Read and write Description This object can be used to set the indication of redundant power supply failure via the alarm contact Monitoring disabled 1 Monitoring enabled 2 6874 en 16 PHOENIX CONTACT 4 103 FL SWITCH MM HS OID Syntax Access Description OID Syntax Access Description OID Syntax Access Description OID Syntax Access Description fIWorkFWCtrlAlarmContactEventLinkState 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 7 1 2 Integer Read and
33. lisaa e ew sm a BEA Order 4 16 6 2003 10 03 56 GE Manager started 10 6 2003 14 29 15 Manager stopped Robo Control ncf 10 6 2003 14 27 29 eee BootP request received from unknown device MA Robo Control ncf 10 6 2003 14 26 48 Filter BootP request received from unknown device M Robo Control ncf 10 6 2003 14 26 48 Print BootP request received from unknown device M Robo Controlncf 10 6 2003 14 17 56 BootP request received from unknown device MA Properties For Help press F1 Network Scanner BootP Server Trap Receiver Server 2 Figure 4 1 Messages from the MMS MCS in the Factory Manager Right click on one of the MMS MCS messages and select the Add new device menu item Under Description select an icon and enter a device name Specify the desired IP parameters under TCP IP see also Section Assigning IP parameters on page 3 4 Description Name Ethemet Device FL SWITCH MM HS 7 TCP IP IP Address 192 168 002 100 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 Figure 4 2 Input mask for IP parameters i Make sure that the assignment of IP parameters via BootP is also activated 4 2 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 16 Configuration and diagnostics Once you have clicked on Add the device is added to the project a
34. x4 8 enable 128 Enter password Apply Figure 5 6 R STP Port Configuration Table menu An overview of the main settings for each port is provided here 5 2 1 2 R STP Port Configuration Modifications of properties can result in complete reconfiguration of Rapid Spanning Tree It is recommended that a suitable root switch and a backup root switch are specified using corresponding priority assignment This page displays the valid R STP configuration settings for the selected port If termination devices or subnetworks are connected without RSTP or STP via a port it is recommended that the Admin Edge Port be set to Edge Port In this way a link modification at this port does not result in a topology modification 5 2 1 3 Switch port ID The validity of switches and ports is determined according to priority vectors Bridge identifier A switch ID consists of 8 bytes as an unsigned integer value When comparing two switch IDs the one with the lowest numeric value is of higher i e better priority The first two bytes contain the priority The last 6 bytes contain the MAC address and thus ensure the uniqueness of the switch ID in the event of identical priority values The switch with the lowest numerical switch ID becomes the root It is recommended that the root port and alternate port are specified using the priority 6874 en 16 PHOENIX CONTACT 5 7 FL SWITCH MM HS
35. 1 2 20 m H H 270775 System Up Time 4 day s 1 h 17 min 12 sec End of last measurement 4 day s 1 h 17 min 9 sec Measurement Interval 30 sec Notice This web page will be refreshed in 10 sec automatically Refresh Figure 4 45 Utilization web page Please note that the scale is spread according to the capacity utilization 4 38 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 16 Configuration and diagnostics Diagnostics Event Table menu Here you will find a list of the latest important events The list contains up to 200 entries from the 200th entry and onwards the oldest entries are overwritten FIFO principle first in first out If old entries are overwritten by new entries a corresponding note is displayed under the event table Event Table System Up Time 0 days 22 hours 4 minutes 32 seconds Time Event The configuration has been modified the first time after the last storing 15 h 44 min 22 sec Link up at port 4 18 h 38 min 32 sec 15 h 44 min 20 sec Link down at port 4 15h43 min 33 sec Link up at port 4 28 50 Link down at port 4 7 sec enabled 6 sec R STP topologie changed 5 sec Disabling port 5 Enter password Clear Figure 4 46 Event Table web page If SNTP is activated the absolute time is displayed under Sys
36. 1 3 6 1 2 1 17 4 The dotidTp group contains bridge specific information 1 dot1dTpLearnedEntryDiscards 2 dotidTpAgingTime 3 dot1dTpFdbTable 1 dot1dTpFdbEntry 1 dotidTpFdbAddress 2 dot1dTpFdbPort 3 dotidTpFdbStatus 4 dotidTpPortTable dotidTpPortEntry 1 dotidTpPort 2 dot1dTpPortMaxlInfo 3 dotidTpPortInFrames 4 dot1dTpPortOutFrames 5 dot1dTpPortInDiscards 5 dot1dTpHCPortTable dot1 dTpHCPortEntry 1 dot1dTpHCPortInFrames 2 dot1dTpHCPortOutFrames 3 dot1dTpHCPortInDiscards 6 dot1dTpPortOverflowTable dot1dTpPortOverflowEntry 1 dot1dTpPortInOverflowFrames 2 dotidTpPortOutOverflowFrames 3 dot1dTpPortInOverflowDiscards 4 3 5 4 dotidStatic 1 3 6 1 2 1 17 5 1 dotidStaticTable 1 dotidStaticEntry 1 dotidStaticAddress 2 dot1dStaticReceivePort 3 dot1dStaticAllowedToGoTo 6874_en_16 PHOENIX CONTACT 4 61 FL SWITCH HS 4 3 6 pBridgeMIB 1 3 6 1 2 1 17 6 4 3 6 1 pBridgeMIBObjects 1 3 6 1 2 1 17 6 1 1 dot1dExtBase 1 dottdDeviceCapabilities 2 dot1dTrafficClassesEnabled 3 dott dGmrpStatus 4 doti dCapabilitiesTable 1 dot1 dCapabilitiesEntry 1 dot1dPortCapabilities 2 dotidPriority 1 doti dPortPriorityTable 1 dotidPortPriorityEntry 1 dotidPortDefaultUserPriority 2 dot1dPortNumTrafficClasses 2 dotidUserPriorityRegenTable 1 dotidUserP
37. 1656673 2744319 2313070 2708876 2799885 2799445 2313410 2313504 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 Pcs Pkt 6874_en_16 PHOENIX CONTACT 12 11 Product designation HOTLINE Should problems occur that cannot be resolved with the help of this documentation please contact our hotline ge 49 52 81 94 62 88 8 factoryline service phoenixcontact com 12 12 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874_en_16
38. Access Description 4 3 3 RFC1213 MIB MIB II 4 3 3 1 System group 1 3 6 1 2 1 1 The system group has mandatory characters for all systems It contains system specific objects If an agent does not have a value for a variable the response is a string with length 0 1 system 1 sysDescr 2 sysObjectlD 3 sysUpTime 4 sysContact 5 sysName 6 sysLocation 7 sysServices 8 sysORLastChange 9 sysORTable EA SS SS 45 sysDescr 1 3 6 1 2 1 1 1 0 Octet string size 0 255 Read A textual description of the entry The value should contain the full name and version num ber of Type of system hardware Operation system software Network software The description may only consist of ASCII characters that can be printed sysObjectlD 1 3 6 1 2 1 1 2 0 Object identifier Read The authorization identification for the manufacturer of the network management subsys tem which is integrated in this device This value is located in the SMI enterprises subtree 1 3 6 1 4 1 and describes which type of device is being managed For example if the manufacturer Phoenix Contact GmbH is assigned subtree 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 it can then assign its bridge the identifier 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 2 1 sysUpTime 1 3 6 1 2 1 1 3 0 TimeTicks Read The time in hundredths of seconds since the last network management unit reset 6874 en 16 PHOENIX CONTACT 4 47 FL SWITCH HS OID Synt
39. FL SWITCH MM HS Firmware update me 5 Trap targets are displayed or set here and the send traps function can be activated or deactivated Clicking on Set Default Values automatically activates the IP address of the computer on which the Factory Manager is installed as the trap target Firmware Properties MMS xi General System Diagnostics Ports Trap Targets Firmware ptions Extended Options Configuration Serial Number 44985039 Firmware Version fi 00 Hardware Revision ns 00 Bootloader Version fi 00 Update OK Cancel Figure 4 8 Firmware menu Here you can view all information about the current device software firmware You can also update the software firmware using the Factory Manager When you click on Update the following window appears which contains information about the firmware used During a firmware update the current status is shown on the MMS display 03 Downloading firmware via the network 04 Saving the firmware in the MMS Flash memory 05 The new firmware has been saved successfully Display goes out bo Device is booting and loading new firmware in the RAM Following a firmware update a reset is executed automatically to activate the new firmware Please make sure that the TFTP Server service program is activated in the toolbar You can monitor the download in the message window 25 50 75 100
40. IGMP Query function only transmits in the management VLAN and only stops if there is a better querier in the management VLAN 8 2 2 Changing the management VLAN ID 8 2 2 1 Configuration in transparent mode 1 InWBM enable the pages for VLAN configuration WBM User Interfaces Virtual LAN 2 Create the required VLANs on the Static VLANs web page 3 VLAN Port Cfg Table web page assign the ports for incoming packets to individual VLANs using the VLAN ID 4 Onthe Configuration web page the desired management VLAN ID can now be set 5 General VLAN Configuration web page set the switch to Tagging VLAN mode 6 Save the configuration on the General Configuration Configuration Management web page and restart the switch 8 2 2 2 Configuration in tagging mode usually used to change the management VLAN ID in the event of an existing VLAN configuration 1 Connect the PC directly to the switch to be configured via a port whose VLAN ID is set to 1 2 Update the firmware to Version 4 03 or later and restart the switch 3 Place another port B in the desired management VLAN Port B must be an untagged member of the desired management VLAN Set the corresponding port VLAN ID if necessary 4 Set the desired VLAN ID as the management VLAN 5 Connect your PC to the switch via port B and save the configuration 8 2 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 16 FL SWITCH MM HS Virtual Local Area Net
41. The manager regularly requests and displays this information The devices can be configured by writing data from the manager to the MIB In the event of an emergency the agents can also send messages traps directly to the manager All configuration modifications which are to take effect after a MMS MCS restart must be saved permanently using the flWorkFWCtrlConfSave object SNMP interface All managed Factory Line components have an SNMP agent This agent of an FL SWITCH MM HS manages Management Information Base MIB 2 according to RFC1213 RMON MIB bridge MIB If MIB Etherlike MIB lana address family MIB IANAifType MIB SNMPv2 MIB SNMP FRAMEWORK MIB P bridge MIB Q bridge MIB RSTP MIB LLDP MIB pnoRedundancy MIB and private SNMP objects from Phoenix Contact FL SWITCH M MIB Network management stations such as a PC with the Factory Manager can read and modify configuration and diagnostic data from network devices via the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP In addition any SNMP tools or network management tools can be used to access Factory Line products via SNMP The MIBs supported by the relevant device must be made available to the SNMP management tools On the one hand these are globally valid MIBs which are specified and described in RFCs Request for Comments This includes for example MIB2 according to RFC1213 which is supported by all SNMP compatible network devices On the other hand m
42. have been inserted or removed The interface module can be used in unmanaged mode LF Loop Failure the redundant ring has been interrupted The redundant ring has been physically interrupted Check the physical connection The switch configured as the redundancy manager did not find a valid MRP module on the last device startup there is no redundant connection Make sure that at least one switch is configured in the MRP ring as the MRP manager and a valid MRP module is plugged in Incorrect ports Make sure that the MRP ring is only created via ports that are configured as an MRP port Unsuitable switches Make sure that all the switches that form the MRP ring support MRP 6874_en_16 PHOENIX CONTACT 1 17 FL SWITCH MM HS a 1 4 Properties MCS The points under Remedy are recommendations they do not all have to be carried out for every error For all other message codes that are not listed here please contact Phoenix Contact The Managed Compact Switch MCS is an Ethernet switch that is suitable for industrial use The MCS has 16 ports but with two versions available FLSWITCH MCS 16 TX with 16 RJ45 ports FLSWITCH MCS 14TX 2FX with 14 RJ45 ports and 2 multi mode glass fiber FX ports Figure 1 11 Versions of the Managed Compact Switch 1 4 1 Firmware versions and their functions MCS Firmware Version 1 03 provides the standard switch functions In addi
43. 1 5 2 Integer Read and write 4 118 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 16 Configuration and diagnostics flSwitchlgmpQuery OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 15 3 2 flSwitchlgmpQueryTable OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 15 3 2 1 flSwitchlgmpQueryEntry 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 15 3 2 1 1 flSwitchlgmpQueryPorts OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 15 3 2 1 1 1 Syntax PortList Access Read Description This object displays the ports that received the IGMP router query BPDUs flSwitchlgmpQueryEnable OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 15 3 2 2 Syntax Integer Access Read and write Description This object can be used to specify the protocol version that the switch uses to transmit IGMP queries Deactivated 1 Version 1 2 Version 2 3 flSwitchlgmpQueryInterval OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 15 3 2 3 Syntax Integer Access Read and write Description This object can be used to specify the time interval during which the switch transmits IGMP queries Default 125s Permissible value range 10 s to 3600 s in increments of 1 s flSwitchlgmpTableErase OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 15 3 3 Syntax Integer Access Read and write Description This object can be used to enable the switch to delete all entries from its IGMP table Do not delete IGMP table 1 Delete IGMP table 2 6874 en 16 PHOENIX CONTACT 4 119 FL SWITCH HS flSwitchRedundancy OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 15 4 flSwitchCtrIRSTPFastRingDetection OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 15 4 1 Syntax Integer Acc
44. 16 00 040400 0 0 00 4 56 4 3 5 Bridge MIB 1 3 6 1 2 1 17 4 62 4 3 6 pBridgeMIB 1 3 6 1 2 1 17 6 4 64 4 3 7 qBridgeMIB 1 3 6 1 21177 4 65 4 3 8 rstp MIB 1 3 6 1 2 1 17 4 1 iseni eee nu 4 68 4 3 9 IANAifType MIB 1 3 6 1 2 1 30 sse 4 69 43 10 IFMIB 1 8 6 1 2 1 31 icd eR RR 4 69 4 3 11 pnoRedundancy 1 3 6 1 4 1 24686 4 72 43 2 depart 4 73 ii PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 16 Table of contents 4 4 Management via local V 24 RS 232 communication interface 4 125 4 4 1 General f hction ree utere eret re 4 125 4 4 2 User interface functions 4 126 4 4 3 Starting with faulty software firmware 4 129 4 5 Management via 4 132 4 5 1 Configuring the Telnet terminal 4 132 4 5 2 Telnet interface 22 4 132 5 Spanning WSS T 5 1 General function 5 2 RS TP start p id atn a de pee ele 5 2 1 Enabling R STP on all switches involved 5 2 5 2 2 Connection failure 5 11 5 2 3 Mixed operation of RSTP STP 5 13 5 2 4 Topolo
45. 7 2 Connecting the supply voltage to the FL SWITCH MM HS M for GL certified operation 2 11 2 7 3 2 12 2 7 4 V 24 RS 232 interface for external management 2 13 2 8 Grounding a nee aan M eet i 2 13 Stanup and functioris 2 tet Fed Pub end 3 1 3 1 Basic settings Le Hee eere 3 1 6874 en 16 PHOENIX CONTACT i FL SWITCH HS FL SWITCH MCS 3 1 1 Default upon delivery default settings 3 1 3 2 Using Smartimode smise niin b eed teo tegere adeunt 3 2 3 2 1 Activating Smart 3 2 3 2 2 Assigning IP parameters 2 3 4 3 2 3 Flowchart after a restart 3 8 3 8 Starting up interface modules with the MMS 3 10 3 3 1 ELE 20X VS BU seein castes conuiuia eins dots 3 10 3 3 2 10 100 2 525 eee terret en Ee antic 3 12 3 3 3 alain e Enc 3 15 3 3 4 FL IF 2FX SC FLIF2FXSM SC sese 3 17 3 3 5 FEAF 2EX S T D s ie coe Pe ERR Ue 3 19 3 3 6 ELAE EX POE 10 100 ut nte ees 3 20 3 3 7 FEAE TX EIGS 100 t rere ceder o
46. Access Read and write Description Contains the IP address of the current default gateway router of the MMS Modifications only take effect once the fIWorkNetlfParamSave object has been executed The flWorkNetlfParamAssignment object must be set to static 1 otherwise objects cannot be written flWorkNetlfParamStatus OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 1 5 Syntax Integer32 1 1024 Access Read Description Indicates whether the IP parameters have been modified but not saved No change 1 Address setting modified but not yet activated 2 Address settings must be saved permanently using the fIWorkFWCtrlConfSave object flWorkNetlfParamSave OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 1 6 Syntax Integer Access Read and write Description Provides the option of saving modified IP parameters or undoing the modifications Undo modification 1 Activate modification 2 Address settings must be saved permanently using the fIWorkFWCtrlConfSave object 6874 en 16 PHOENIX CONTACT 4 79 FL SWITCH HS flWorkNetlfParamAssignment OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 1 7 Syntax Integer Access Read and write Description Provides the option of modifying the assignment mechanism for IP parameters Static IP address 1 Assignment via BootP 2 Assignment via DHCP 3 Assignment via DCP 4 Modifications to the assignment mechanism also affect the management functions via the web interface via V 24 RS 232 and Telnet Modifications to the assignmen
47. Activating deactivating port security access control for web Switching the VLAN mode Switching the operating mode Activating deactivating the RSTP redundancy mechanism Reset The activation deactivation of the web server or Telnet function only takes effect after a SAVE and subsequent restart All settings are transferred using APPLY but are not saved permanently Use the SAVE function to save the active configuration settings permanently 4 4 2 3 Structure of the user interface screens Login screen Login Screen gt Phoenix Contact Modular Managed Switch System lt Phoenix Contact GmbH amp Co KG www phoenixcontact com Running switch application version Password 1 68740010 Figure 4 52 User interface login screen 4 124 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 16 Configuration and diagnostics The login screen indicates the version of the firmware used A password must be entered to make other settings By default upon delivery the password is private Itis case sensitive We strongly recommend that you change the password via SNMP or WBM Basic switch configuration Basic Switch Configuration MAC Address HO OK HN IP Address Subnet Mask K KKK Default Gateway IP Parameter flssignment Rapid Spanning Tree Current Vlan Status Vlan Mode Port Security f
48. Configuration 2 Switch Station Device Information Vendor Phoenix Contact GmbH amp Co KG Address D 32823 Blomberg Phone 49 0 5235 3 00 Internet www phoenixcontact com Type FL SWITCH MM HS Order No 28 32 328 Serial Number 24346038 Bootloader Version 1 31 Firmware Version 4 60 System Bus Version H8 05 00 MXT1 04 00 MXT2 04 00 Hardware Version HS 04 MXT1 02 2 00 MAC Address 00 0 45 01 27 45 user defined Name of Device fi switch mm hs200 System Description Modular Managed Switch MMS Physical Location Test Contact Unknown IP Address 172 15 2 200 Subnet Mask 255 255 0 0 Default Gateway 172 15 2 200 Figure 4 14 Device Information web page General menu This page contains a range of static information about the device and the manufacturer Technical Data menu This page lists the main technical data Hardware Installation menu This page contains a connection diagram for connecting the redundant power supply and the alarm contact Local Diagnostics menu This page describes the meaning of the switchable diagnostic and status indicators and lists the various display options for the 7 segment display Serial Port menu This page lists the transmission parameters for serial communication 4 12 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874_en_16 Configuration and diagnostics 4 2 8 8 G
49. Configuration menu The switch supports a maximum of 32 different VLANs After switching the VLAN mode from Tagging to Transparent or vice versa the active configuration must be saved and a device reset triggered so that the modification becomes active The current valid state can be read in the Current Tagging Status line The GVRP protocol GARP VLAN Registration Protocol can be activated in VLAN Tagging mode for dynamic registration of the VLANs at the relevant neighbor The GVRP Switch indicates the selected user setting or enables the setting GVRP is used to dynamically create VLANs across several switches If GVRP is set to Disable the switch is transparent for GVRP BPDUs GVRP data packets 6874 en 16 PHOENIX CONTACT 8 3 FL SWITCH MM HS If GVRP is active the switch sends GVRP BPDUS every ten seconds If the VLAN assignment of a port to a specified VLAN is changed the adjacent switches will be informed of this change within the next 10 seconds When the GVRP is disabled the adjacent switches also remove the dynamically learned ports within the next 10 seconds If GVRP packets are missing the learned group assignments are rejected after approximately 20 seconds If a static VLAN is installed on a switch a port can be added to this VLAN via GVRP The port is listed in the Current VLANs Table However only statically created group members are saved 8 4 Current VLANs The Curren
50. FL SWITCH MM HS Rev gt 10 01 Wi ILB FN 24 0116 DIOT6 2TX Rev gt 10 01 20 PSM 4 Code A Fehler Wamungen A infos A SPS Fehler Drucken Buskonfigurator Dr cken Sie F1 f r Hie Figure 9 2 The switch in the bus configuration under PC WorX If the switch is not listed in the device catalog the device description provided by Phoenix Contact must be imported The latest device description can be downloaded at www down load phoenixcontact com If the device description is available in the device catalog the following options are available for bus configuration Manual The components are transferred to the bus configuration from the device catalog using drag amp drop Automatic The devices are entered via the Head PROFINET function which means that they can be accessed in the network via DCP Discovery and Configuration Protocol For this the devices must be supplied with power and the operating mode must be set to Profinet Interface modules and bus configuration Nointerface modules configured gt IP address assignment only by the control system Allinterface modules configured correctly gt IP address assignment by the control System transmission of process data and alarms from configured slots 6874 en 16 PHOENIXCONTACT 9 3 FL SWITCH MM HS interface modules configured incorrectly gt
51. Factory automation process Factory automation process Factory automation process automation building automa automation building automa automation building automa tion tion tion Redundancy Optional support of MRP as Optional support of MRPas Optional support of MRP as client according to IEEE 802 3 client according to IEEE 802 3 Optional support of MRP for Realtime as client bumpless ring redundancy client according to IEEE 802 3 Optional support of MRP for Realtime as client bumpless ring redundancy Mandatory support of MRP for planned duplication MRPD as client Data transmission 100 Mbps full duplex manda tory 1 Gbps full duplex op tional 100 Mbps full duplex manda tory 1 Gbps full duplex op tional 100 Mbps full duplex manda tory 1 Gbps full duplex op tional Media access control re dundancy mechanisms 1 RSTP optional or replaced by MRP 2 CutThroughMode is recommended 3 Discard on received frame in error is optional when using the CutThroughMode 4 Atleasttwo priorities required 4 recommended 1 RSTP optional or replaced by MRP 2 CutThroughMode is recommended 3 Discard on received frame in error is optional when using the CutThroughMode 4 Atleasttwo priorities required 4 recommended 1 optional or replaced by MRP 2 CutThroughMode is recommended 3 Discard on received frame in error is optional when using the CutThrou
52. Firmware 4 50 offers the following additional functions SNMP traps be disabled individually The VLAN for management can be set VLAN ID to manage web SNMP ping IGMP query the switch in VLAN Tagging mode DHCP relay agent can be disabled according to the port PROFINET alarms and configuration comparison Fastaging on link down Extended LED diagnostics identification of the switch in the PROFINET environment and detection of the Missing IP parameter following restart status Test traps to check communication Deletion of the MAC address table from WBM and SNMP Firmware 4 60 offers the following additional functions Media Redundancy Protocol supported as a client Extended PROFINET IO device function Support of up to 128 multicast groups of which up to 20 are static groups Firmware 4 70 offers the following additional functions Support of time synchronization using SNTP 6874 en 16 PHOENIX CONTACT 1 19 FL SWITCH HS Support of the PDEV function for the PROFINET environment Support of Smart mode for easily selecting the operating mode plug support MRP master function in conjunction with MEM PLUG MRM 1 20 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 16 The Modular Managed Switch System MMS and the Managed Compact Switch MCS 1 4 2 Firmware functions and the required hardware MCS Table 1 2 Functions and the required hardware Function Required hard
53. Following startup the MMS MCS indicates Cd configuration difference in the display If Cd appears in the display insert the correct interface modules and restart the switch The desired actual configuration is no longer monitored during the system runtime 9 2 2 Configuring the switch as a PROFINET IO device Once all switches have been added to the bus configuration the following settings must be made for the individual switches via the Detail View tab device details The PROFINET device name must be checked and modified if necessary The IP address and the subnet mask must be checked and modified if necessary The update time for inputs should be set to 512 ms default The update time for outputs should be set to 512 ms default monitoring time should be set to 2000 ms default Theinterface modules must be selected from the module catalog and added to the station Geratedetails FL SWITCH MM HS pn mms61 172 16 27 61 PROFINET Einstellungen Bezeichnung Wert 3 Hersteller Phoenix i D Produktbezeichnung 1 FLSWITCHMMHS Funktionsbeschreibung O Modularer managbarer Switch als Profinet IO D D Sitch D D Beselumme 2832328 Set by the user D Revision 00 4 00 5 pusiPRoFINET Ger tename Fl switch mm hs6 koffer de 4 Station name B Stationsname
54. Network VLAN 8 4 1 Static VLANs Static VLANs can be created on this web page Up to 31 new VLANs can be created VLAN 2 to VLAN 32 If more are created a corresponding message will be displayed VLAN 1 is always created statically and all ports are added to it as untagged members By default upon delivery with Tagging VLAN mode activated network based management interfaces WBM Telnet and SNMP are only available from VLAN 1 This means that in order to access the management interfaces you must either implement data traffic in tagged mode without VLAN tag where the switch is accessed via ports using the VLAN ID or you must use data traffic with VLAN tag the ID of which is 1 Static VLANs Select VLAN VLAN ID 2 up to 4094 VLAN Name Bu 2 Ports 1 8 FF UuUTTT toggle all Ports 9 16 F U UT toggle all T Tagged U Untagged F Forbidden None Enter password Apply Delete Figure 8 3 Static VLANs menu On this web page you can create static VLANs by assigning a VLAN ID and VLAN name The ports are then assigned to the individual VLANs by selecting the relevant VLAN and clicking on the character in the Ports 1 8 line that indicates the current port status Various options are selected by clicking on the status several times By clicking on toggle all all available ports in the relevant port group change their status The possible states are T Tagged Ports wi
55. PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 16 FL SWITCH HS Rapid Spanning Tree Priority and MAC address There is only ever one root port per switch Exception The switch supports several Spanning Tree domains Designated ports Ports in the forwarding state of the designated switch These are the ports with the best path to the root switch Switch ID The switch with the lowest bridge identifier is the root switch The bridge identifier consists ofthe MAC address and the priority Since the priority appears before the MAC address the assignment of the appropriate priority clearly identifies the root switch independent of the MAC address The switch with the highest priority lowest value becomes the root switch For every switch port within the network a unique cost calculation is created These root path costs are the sum of all path costs for one packet on the path between the root switch and corresponding switch port The port of a switch with the lowest root path costs is always the active port If the same root path costs have been calculated for two or more ports the Switch priority followed by the port priority determine the priority of the path Port ID The port identifier consists of the path costs and the priority Since the priority appears before the path costs the assignment of the appropriate priority clearly identifies the root port independent of the path costs The port with the highest priority lowest value become
56. PHOENIX CONTACT 8 9 FL SWITCH MM HS f Termination device in VLAN2 Termination device in VLAN2 ET Manual configuration VLAN2 port member Tagged VLAN2 port member Untagged Port VID VLAN2 Figure 8 6 Typical configuration for VLAN and R STP 8 10 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 16 Operating as a PROFINET device 9 Operating as a PROFINET device Switching to PROFINET mode The switch is supported as a PROFINET device in PC WorX Version 5 00 26 or later In a PROFINET application the PROFINET IO controller is responsible for starting up the Switch This includes assigning the IP parameters comparing the desired actual configuration and archiving alarms sent by the switch In the eventthat a device is replaced the control system detects the replacement device and starts it up automatically For the control program the switch as a PROFINET IO device provides the link states as a process data item 9 1 FL SWITCH MM HSPreparing the switch for PROFINET mode By default upon delivery the switch operates in Default mode and must be set to PROFINET mode once Two mechanisms are available for switching the mode Following startup and assignment of an IP address the operating mode can be changed on the corresponding page in WBM see Section Operating Mode menu on page 4 21 Through configu
57. Port Far End Link status enable Fault 9 8 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 16 Operating as a PROFINET device 9 5 PDEV Function description The PDEV function provides an extended scope of functions for switches in PROFINET mode This includes displaying neighbor and topology information in the engineering tool This information is determined using the Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP and can be used to compare the desired and actual network In addition the PDEV function is used to display the transmitted information via the Ethernet ports The PDEV function uses two new submodules nterface submodule with port number 0 8 00 X 0 to submodule with port number 0x8IXX I Interface ID X Port number These submodules are represented in the Step7 engineering tool PROFINET communication enables information about the port speed duplex mode and the link status to be read An engineering tool reads and then displays the neighbor and topology information via SNMP 9 5 1 PROFINET stack and PDEV function The PDEV function is supported by PROFINET stack Version 2 2 The following functions are supported by PN stack 2 2 Link status port mode and port MAC address can be requested via the port Storing of PDEV data Reorganization of submodules for integrating interfaces and new ports Use of the PN stack LLDP in PN mode used for neighbor and topology detection Support for device replacem
58. Port identifier The port ID consists of 4 bits for the port priority and 12 bits for the port number The port ID is interpreted as an unsigned integer value When comparing two port IDs the one with the lowest numeric value is of higher i e better priority R STP Port Configuration Port Number HS Interface x1 Port Port 1 STP Part State forwarding STP Enable Disable Enable Operational Edge Port Admin Edge Part Priority Admin Path Cost Path Cost Forward Transitions Designated Root Designated Bridge Operating as an edge port Non Edge Port Edge Port 128 D upto 240 in steps of 16 0 1 up to 200 000 000 forces default path cost 18 B 8000 00 40 45 00 94 1F 8000 00 AD 45 00 8A 1F Designated Port Designated Cost 8001 Port Priority 128 Port Number 1 0 L Enter password Protocol Compatibility Port Mode Port is in the Rapid Spanning Tree mode 210 Enter password Port Configuration of port 1 General Security PoE F STP VLAN Figure 5 7 R STP Port Configuration Port Number Indicates the number of the port currently selected Port Name Indicates the name of the port STP Port State Indicates the status in which this port takes part in STP Operational Edge Port Indicates whether this port is operated as an edge port An edge port is a port at which only termination devices should be operated Th
59. Pushthe right hand extension module along the DIN rail to the right until the plug in contact is completely free 4 Pull down the holding latches using a suitable tool e g screwdriver 5 Then swivel the bottom of the module away from the DIN rail slightly A Next lift the module upwards away from the DIN rail Figure 2 5 Removing extension modules 2 4 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 16 Mounting and installation 2 3 Mounting and removing interface modules MMS NOTE Ensure that the surface of the head station or extension module housing is clean NOTE If the FL SWITCH MM HS with two FL MXT extension modules is additionally operated with one FL IF MEM 2TX D memory module and up to four FL IF POF SCRJ D interface modules at the same time the arrangement according to Section Arrangement of the interface modules on page 2 7 must be observed OO Hot plugging When inserting and removing interface modules you do not have to switch off the supply voltage The interface modules are detected automatically and logged to the network management Mounting 1 Insertthe interface modules in the slots of the basic modules The guide bars on the top of the interface modules must be pushed into the guide slots of the basic module without tilting them Figure 2 6 Mounting interface modules 2 Now push the interface modules towards the basic module until t
60. Rapid Spanning Tree mode Enter password ForceRstp Configuration of port 1 General Security PoE R STP VLAN Figure 5 8 Protocol Compatibility If a port receives STP BPDUS it switches automatically to STP mode Automatic switching to R STP mode does not take place Switching to R STP mode can only be forced via ForceRSTP or via a restart 6874 en 16 PHOENIX CONTACT 5 9 FL SWITCH MM HS Structure of the ring ID Information in WBM Ring detection states a RSTP Fast Ring Detection The RSTP Fast Ring Detection function can be activated on the RSTP Configuration web page see page 5 4 This function speeds up the switch over to a redundant path in the event of an error and provides easy diagnostics RSTP fast ring detection provides each ring with an ID this ID is made known to each switch in the relevant ring A switch can belong to several different rings at the same time The ring ID consists of the port number of the blocking port and the MAC address of the corresponding switch Advantages of the ring ID Easierto identify redundant paths and locate blocking ports Possible to check whether the desired topology corresponds to the actual topology R STP Fast Ring Table Local ring ports Blocking port of ring No Status A B Port on Switch Ring ID Figure 5 9 RSTP Ring Table The following information is displayed on the web page and via SNMP Local r
61. The IANAifType MIB defines the ifTable in MIB II See Interface group 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 on page 4 49 4 3 10 IF MIB 1 3 6 1 2 1 31 4 3 10 1 ifMIBObjects 1 3 6 1 2 1 31 1 1 ifXTable 1 ifXEntry 1 ifName 2 iflnMulticastPkts 3 iflnBroadcastPkts 4 ifOutMulticastPkts 5 ifOutBroadcastPkts 6 ifHCInOctets 7 ifHCInUcastPkts 8 ifHCInMulticastPkts 9 ifHCInBroadcastPkts ifHCOutOctets ifHCOutUcastPkts ifHCOutMulticastPkts ifHCOutBroadcastPkts ifLinkUpDownTrapEnable ifHighSpeed ifPromiscuousMode ffConnectorPresent ifAlias 19 ifCounterDiscontinuityTime 2 ifStackTable 1 ifStackEntry 1 ifStackHigherLayer 2 ifStackLowerLayer 3 ifStackStatus 3 ifTestTable 1 ifTestEntry 1 ifTestlD 2 ifTestStatus 3 ifTestType 4 ifTestResult b ifTestCode 6 ifTestOwner 4 ifRcvAddressTable 1 ifRcvAddressEntry 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 1 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 gt 6874 16 4 67 FL SWITCH HS 1 ifRcvAddressAddress 2 ifRcvAddressStatus 3 ifRcvAddressType 5 ifTableLastChange 6 ifStackLastChange 4 3 10 2 ifConformance 1 3 6 1 2 1 31 2 1 ifGroups 1 ifGeneralGroup 2 ifFixedLengthGroup 3 ifHCFixedLengthGroup 4 ifPac
62. User Interfaces only the web pages for configuring the selected functions are enabled disabled in the WBM menu Setting the refresh intervals for the automatic update of the web pages Here you can also set the refresh interval for automatic update of different web pages If the interval is set to 0 the pages will no longer be updated Automatic update of web pages is only possible when using Internet Explorer Version 5 5 or later 6874 en 16 PHOENIX CONTACT 4 19 FL SWITCH MM HS User Interfaces Telnet Server C Disable Enable Web Server C Disable Enable SNMP Agent C Disable Enable The modified adjustments become effective after saving the configuration and rebooting the device Web Pages Redundancy C Disable Enable Enabling the module Redundancy Protocols you get additional web pages to activate the Redundancy Protocols Protocol and to configure it Setting the redundancy mode to disable the Redundancy Protocols configuration will be restored to the default state and the Redundancy Protocols Protocol will be deactivated Look for menu item Switch Station Rapid Spanning Tree and Switch Station Media Redundancy Multicast Filtering Disable Enable Enabling the module Multicast Filtering you get additional web pages to modify various multicast adjustments Disabling the multicast web pages has no influence on the multicast configu
63. Xmodem 7 Close Cancel Figure 4 58 Xmodem Send File option 1 Make sure that the protocol is set to Xmodem otherwise the transmission will fail 4 128 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 16 Configuration and diagnostics Clicking Send starts the file transfer The following screen shows the progress of the file transmission Xmodem file send for FL SWITCH MM HS Sending ENCurrentPhoenis FL SWITCH MM HS bn Packet Error checking Retries 0 Total retries 0 Last error File kak Elapsed Remaining Throughput Figure 4 59 File transmission with Xmodem i File transmission may take a few minutes Do not perform any other actions while the box is open Once the box has closed a message appears in HyperTerminal Enter c to continue with the boot process or trigger a reset using the reset button 6874 en 16 PHOENIX CONTACT 4 129 FL SWITCH MM HS 4 5 Management via Telnet The Telnet protocol provides the function of a virtual terminal It offers remote access from aspecific computer to other systems in the network e g PCs or MMS Telnet uses TCP IP on the network supports the functions of Layers 5 to 7 and provides bidirectional communication for linking data termination devices with the relevant processes The destination system is generally referred to as the Telnet server while the specific local System is the Telnet client It is onl
64. a MMS that has already been parameterized the existing configuration remains active 3 3 2 2 Functions Line monitoring According to standard IEEE 802 3 the switch monitors the connected fiber optic cables for interrupts Ports that are not being used are considered cable interrupts In addition a POF path to a deactivated termination device is also considered a cable interrupt as the connected device cannot send a link test pulse because it is switched off Auto negotiation Auto negotiation is a method whereby the switch automatically detects the operating parameters for the connected network and sets the corresponding parameters 10 Mbps 100 Mbps data transmission rate and half full duplex transmission mode for its F SMA ports Automatic port setting eliminates the need for manual intervention by the user The auto negotiation function can be activated deactivated via the web interface 3 3 2 3 Connecting the F SMA connectors To prevent dirt from entering the connectors do not remove the dust protection caps until just before connecting the connectors The same applies for the protective caps on the connectors 3 12 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 16 Startup and functions F SMA is a standardized fiber optic connection We recommend the use of easy to operate F SMA connectors with quick mounting connection from Phoenix Contact The connectors are secured on the interface module by manually
65. address automatically Mac Addresses in the range from 01 00 5E 80 00 00 up to 01 00 5E FF FF FF will not be allowed to avoid input mistakes For limiting the visibilty of profinet devices in the network create a multicast group for profinet dcp identify requests with the mac address 01 0 00 00 00 Logout Apply Delete Figure 7 2 Static Multicast Groups menu In order to check which ports are assigned to which group select one of the existing groups The corresponding MAC address is then displayed in the Multicast Group Address text field The members of the group are indicated by the activated checkboxes Multicast addresses Do not use multicast MAC addresses that are in the range from 01 00 5 80 00 00 to 01 00 5e FF FF FF An incorrect MAC address format and the entry of non multicast addresses is indicated and the entry is not permitted Please note that in multicast MAC addresses the bytes are separated by a colon and IP multicast addresses are separated by a full stop 7 3 3 Procedure for creating a multicast group Gain an overview of the multicast applications available within the network and the multicast addresses used Create a group for every multicast application or for the multicast address used and for each switch add the ports to which a device of the appropriate group is directly connected or via which the device can be accessed 7 4 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 1
66. and auto crossing functions are activated Link monitoring for the twisted pair ports is not activated If an interface module is inserted in a MMS that has already been parameterized the existing configuration remains active 3 3 1 2 Functions Auto negotiation Auto negotiation is a method whereby the switch automatically detects the operating parameters for the connected network and sets the corresponding parameters 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps data transmission rate and half or full duplex transmission mode for its RJ45 ports Automatic port setting eliminates the need for manual intervention by the user The auto negotiation function can be activated deactivated via the web interface Auto crossing There is no need to distinguish between 1 1 and crossover cables as the transmit and receive cables are crossed automatically Auto crossing is only available if auto negotiation is activated Auto polarity The polarity is changed automatically by the switch if a pair of twisted pair receive cables RD and RD are connected incorrectly 3 10 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 16 Startup and functions Line monitoring The switch uses link test pulses according to standard IEEE 802 3 at regular intervals to monitor the connected TP TX cable segments for short circuits and interrupts Ports that are not being used are considered cable interrupts In addition a TP TX path to a deactivated termination devi
67. are hidden if Redundancy is set to Disable on the User Interfaces web page following MRP configuration 6874 16 5 3 FL SWITCH MM HS Now switch to the R STP General page in the Switch Station menu Here you will find various information about the Spanning Tree configuration R STP General Rapid Spanning Tree Status This bridge is the root bridge System Up Time 1 days 18 hours 35 minutes 9 seconds Last Topology Change 1 days 18 hours 36 minutes seconds ago Topology Changes 1 Designated Root 8000 00 A0 45 00 8A 1F Root Port 0 Root Cost 0 Hello Time 2s Forward Delay 15s Note This web page wil be refreshed in 1 sec automatically change the interval at the web page Services Figure 5 3 R STP General The web page displays the parameters with which the switch is currently operating R STP Configuration It is sufficient to set the Rapid Spanning Tree status to Enable in order to start R STP using default settings Priority values can be specified for the switch The bridge and backup root can be specified via these priority values Only multiples of 4096 are permitted The desired value can be entered in the Priority field The value will be rounded automatically to the next multiple of 4096 Once you have confirmed the modification by entering your password the initialization mechanism i
68. can be accessed using the set IP address and does not send any kind of requests on the receipt of IP parameters If you modify the IP address and or the other IP parameters via WBM once you click on Apply you will no longer have access via the IP address set in the browser Bootstrap Protocol BootP The switch sends a BootP request after every restart and receives a BootP reply with IP parameters If the BootP reply is disabled the switch starts after the third request with the last IP parameters saved If the switch has no saved IP parameters the switch continues to send BootP requests until it receives a response with a BootP reply 6874 en 16 PHOENIX CONTACT 4 13 FL SWITCH MM HS Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP Once DHCP has been enabled the switch attempts to apply network parameters from a DHCP server The setting regardless of whether DHCP is enabled or not is saved permanently Once DHCP has been enabled the display contains 01 and waits for IP parameters from a DHCP server As long as no IP parameters have been assigned by a DHCP server the switch can still be accessed via the previously set IP parameters Discovery and Configuration Protocol DCP Mode for assigning IP addresses in PROFINET After startup the switch waits for the startup of the IO controller or an engineering tool This status is indicated by display output dP The switch can only be accessed after co
69. contains statistical information which be read and represented e g as a time curve 1 historyControlTable 1 historyControlEntry 1 historyControllndex 2 historyControlDataSource 3 historyControlBucketsRequested 4 historyControlBucketsGranted 5 historyControllnterval 6 historyControlOwner 7 historyControlStatus 2 etherhistoryTable 1 etherhistoryEntry 1 etherHistoryIndex 2 etherHistorySamplelIndex 3 etherHistoryIntervalStart 6874 16 4 55 FL SWITCH HS etherHistoryDropEvents etherHistoryOctets etherHistoryPkts etherHistoryBroadcastPkts etherHistoryMulticastPkts etherHistoryCRCAlignErrors etherHistoryUndersizePkts etherHistoryOversizePkts etherHistoryFragments etherHistoryJabbers etherHistoryCollisions etherHistoryUtilization 4 3 4 3 alarm 1 3 6 1 2 1 16 3 The alarm group requests statistical values and compares them with the defined limit val ues If a value is above or below the limit value an alarm and a trap are generated 1 alarmTable 1 alarmEntry 1 alarmIndex 2 alarminterval 3 alarmVariable 4 alarmSampleType 5 alarmValue 6 alarmStartupAlarm 7 alarmRisingThreshold 9 alarmRisingEventlndex alarmFallingEventindex alarmOwner 8 alarmFallingThreshold 0 1 2 alarmStatus 1 4
70. functions are activated for the twisted pair port and the auto negotiation function is activated for the POF port Port monitoring is not activated for the two ports If an interface module is inserted in a MMS that has already been parameterized the existing configuration remains active 3 3 6 2 Functions of the POF interface Line monitoring According to standard IEEE 802 3 the switch monitors the connected fiber optic cables for interrupts Ports that are not being used are considered cable interrupts In addition a POF path to a deactivated termination device is also considered a cable interrupt as the connected device cannot send a link test pulse because it is switched off 3 20 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 16 Startup and functions Auto negotiation Auto negotiation is a method whereby the switch automatically detects the operating parameters for the connected network and sets the corresponding parameters 10 Mbps 100 Mbps data transmission rate and half full duplex transmission mode for its F SMA ports Automatic port setting eliminates the need for manual intervention by the user The auto negotiation function can be activated deactivated via the web interface 3 3 6 3 Functions of the twisted pair interface Auto negotiation Auto negotiation is a method whereby the switch automatically detects the operating parameters for the connected network and sets the corresponding paramete
71. if it is integrated under a control sys tem in the bus configuration in the engineering tool A GSD file and an FDCML file for inte gration can be downloaded at www download phoenixcontact com 9 2 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 16 Operating as PROFINET device WORX Bearbeiten anscht projekt Code onine Extras z Zu D jn aaa 6757 we bel am no IL EXER n Fi sestch mm hs koffer de 192 168 0 7 PROFINET Einstelungent koffer 350 PN 192 166 0 2 FR Ressource R STD RES 11 350 E PROFINET e fl switch koffer de 192 166 0 fel bkS koffer de 192 168 0 6 D Factory Line F r PROFINET IO 5 koffer de 192 166 0 3 inue ibk toffer de 192 165 0 4 Gordtefamie CC Bg ibio koffer de 192 168 0 5 Bestelnummer 999 INTERBUS Ren 4 J 1001 235 3 5 BB oen accuse PROFINET Ger tename fi swkchs koffer de Bg wk verbunden D Ssemme 2 0 0 O tetnehmemane b pee E 3 l X Geratexataiog EF EE 22 2 C3 OPTOSUB 2 80 HE IET PROFINET IO oo 9 INTERBUS Proxy 22 10 Cortioller 10 Device 1 FLIL 24 BK PN PAC Rev gt 10 010 RJ
72. interface modules Connection medium Number of Ethernet ports Head station Head station and one extension module Head station and two extension modules System interface for extension module Number of extension modules Transmitted signals V 24 RS 232 communication interface Connection format Floating alarm contact Voltage Current carrying capacity Interfaces at the extension modules Number of slots for interface modules Connection medium Number of Ethernet ports System interface for extension module Transmitted signals RJ45 interfaces standard Number Connection format Connection medium Cable impedance Transmission speed Maximum network segment expansion RJ45 interfaces Power over Ethernet IEEE 802 3af Number Connection format Connection medium Cable impedance Transmission speed Maximum network segment expansion Complete configuration support Connection of the PoE supply Nominal value Permissible voltage ranges 4 Via interface modules flexible media support 16 24 2 Supply voltage control signals data Mini DIN female connector 24 V DC 100 mA maximum 4 Via interface modules flexible media support 8 Incoming and outgoing system bus interface Supply voltage control signals data 2 8 pos RJ45 female connector on the switch Twisted pair cable with a conductor cross section of 0 14 mm to 0 22 mm 100 Ohm 10 100 Mbps 100m 2 8 pos RJ45 female connector on th
73. m minimum Depends on the interface module 6400 m with glass fiber with F G 50 125 0 7 dB km F1200 2800 m with glass fiber with F G 50 125 1 6 dB km F800 10 000 m with glass fiber with F G 62 5 125 0 7 dB km F1000 3000 m with glass fiber with F G 62 5 125 2 6 dB km F600 36 000 m with glass fiber with F G 9 125 0 36 dB km 32 000 m with glass fiber with F G 9 125 0 4 dB km 26 000 m with glass fiber with F G 9 125 0 5 dB km 12 4 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 16 Technical data and ordering data Mechanical tests Shock test according to IEC 60068 2 27 Vibration resistance according to IEC 60068 2 6 Free fall according to IEC 60068 2 32 Conformance with EMC directives Noise emission according to EN 5501 1 Warning Operation 25g 11 ms period half sine shock pulse Storage transport 50g 11 ms period half sine shock pulse Operation storage transport 5g 10 150 Hz Criterion 3 im Class A The limit values of the electromagnetic noise emission according to EN 55011 Class A are only observed by the module if it is installed in a grounded metal control cabinet Radio interference field strengths according to EN 55022 Electrostatic discharge ESD according to EN 61000 4 2 Electromagnetic fields according to IEC 61000 4 3 Conducted interference according to IEC 61000 4 6 Fast transients burst according to IEC 61000 4 4 Surge voltages according to IEC 61000 4 5 12 1 2 General data Function Switch pr
74. module head station incoming System interface oooop000000 oopopopop00000 nuuuuuuuuu aooaoooaana 00 67961011 Slots for interface modules Figure 1 4 Front view of the extension module Diagnostic status indicators Important information is displayed directly on the device Connection for second extension module Connect the second extension module here Connection for interface modules This is where the various interface modules are inserted and locked in place 1 8 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 16 The Modular Managed Switch System MMS and the Managed Compact Switch MCS Slotfor first extension module head station Connect this extension module either to a head station or to the first extension module here 1 2 4 3 View of the interface modules example Gilde Positive latches Connection for head station extension module Marking groove Mounting screws Ethernet ports connection on the front Ethernet ports connection on the bottom 68741002 Figure 1 5 View of the interface modules example Connection for extension module head station This connector is used to connect the interface module and the extension module or the head station Guide bars These bars aid installation and hold the interface modul
75. module with 2 x twisted pair 10 100 Mbps in RJ45 format for connection on the bottom and parameterization memory Interface module with 2 x glass fiber multi mode 100 Mbps in SC format for connection on the bottom Interface module with 2 x glass fiber single mode 100 Mbps in SC format for connection on the bottom Interface module with 2 x twisted pair 10 100 Mbps in RJ45 format for connection on the front Interface module with 2 x twisted pair 10 100 Mbps in RJ45 format for connection on the bottom 12 3 3 Products Description Managed Compact Switch with 16 RJ45 ports Managed Compact Switch with 14 RJ45 ports and two FX ports in SC D format 12 34 Accessories Description Labeling field for labeling the ports of the head station and extension modules RJ45 connector with additional latching Gray RJ45 connector set for linear cable Green RJ45 connector set for crossed cable Assembly tool for RJ45 connector Factory Manager startup diagnostic software Network monitoring with HMI SCADA systems Order designation FL SWITCH MM HS M FL FLIF MEM 2TX D FLIF 2FX SC D FLIF 2FX SM SC D FL IF 2TX VS RJ F FL IF 2TX VS RJ D Ordering data MCS Type FL SWITCH MCS 16 TX FL SWITCH MCS 14TX 2FX MMS MCS Order designation FLM LABEL VS 08 T G RJ45 IP20 FL PLUG RJ45 GR 2 FL PLUG RJ45 GN 2 FL CRIMPTOOL FL SWT FL SNMP OPC SERVER Order No 2832742 2832904 2891084 2891770 Order No 2832
76. multicast packets of known multicast groups and only forwards packets to those ports to which corresponding multicast receivers are connected IGMP snooping can only be used on Layer 2 if all termination devices send IGMP messages The IP stack of multicast compatible termination devices with applications linked to a multicast address automatically sends the relevant membership reports IGMP snooping operates independently of the Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP 6874_en_16 PHOENIX CONTACT 7 7 FL SWITCH MM HS 7 4 1 1 Extended multicast filtering If IGMP snooping is active multicast data streams are also detected for which no membership reports of possible recipients are registered For these multicasts groups are created dynamically These multicasts are forwarded to the querier i e the querier port is entered in the group If the switch itself is the querier these multicasts are blocked 7 4 2 General Multicast Configuration web page This web page provides global settings for multicast support Here IGMP snooping can be activated and an aging time can be specified for IGMP snooping information General Multicast Configuration IGMP Snooping Disable Enable IGMP Snoop Aging 00 s 30s up to 36005 C Disable IGMP Query C Version 1 Version 2 IGMP Query Interval 120 s 10s up to 3500s AT Extended Multicast Source detection Fwd unkn MCs to querier C Disable E
77. parameters that are required to save the active configuration or load a new configuration and to modify them by entering a valid password It can also be used to restart the system with the relevant configuration Configuration The current configuration is equal to the saved Status of current configuration one in the non volatile memory of the Head Station Figure 4 24 Configuration Management web page Possible states for Status of current configuration configuration has been modified but not saved also indicated by the flashing floppy disk icon Savingthe current configuration current configuration is equal to the one saved in the non volatile memory of the Switch current configuration was saved Save current active configuration together with the corresponding configuration name can be saved configuration here by entering a valid password Save current configuration Configuration Name MMs configuration Enter password Save Figure 4 25 Save current configuration web page If the new configuration is not activated by a reset after a configuration download the Save current configuration command overwrites the previously loaded configuration and instead saves the active configuration of the MMS Set default upon delivery This option can be used to reset the switch to its default settings default upon delive
78. ports which can be individually equipped with interface modules A maximum of 2 extension modules can be connected to the head station The maximum system configuration therefore comprises 24 ports It is not possible to operate the extension modules without the head station The FL MXT M extension module is approved for shipbuilding and off onshore applications thanks to its certification according to GL Certificate No 2427504 HH FL IF i Please observe the list of GL certified components on page 12 9 Interface modules provide the desired interface to the network The two outlet directions the various types of media supported and the port density of two ports per interface module provide a high degree of flexibility in terms of the system configuration 1 4 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 16 The Modular Managed Switch System MMS and the Managed Compact Switch 5 1 2 2 MMS firmware versions and their functions Firmware Version 1 03 provides the standard switch functions In addition firmware Version 1 11 supports the Spanning Tree redundancy mechanism Firmware 2 03 offers the following additional functions Multicast filter mechanisms maximum of 20 multicast groups IGMP snooping and querier function Memory module support Firmware 2 10 offers the following additional functions A Auto refresh of various WBM pages POF and FX interface module support Extensive support a
79. remote ID when completing the fields for DHCP option 82 default IP ad dress flSwitchRelayAgentDhcpPortTable OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 15 5 5 flSwitchRelayAgentDhcpPortEntry OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 15 5 5 1 Syntax Access Description This table provides port specific information for the DHCP relay agent OID Syntax Access Description flSwitchRelayAgentDhcpPortCtrllndex 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 15 5 5 1 1 Integer32 1 1024 Read This object specifies the port number OID Syntax Access Description flSwitchRelayAgentDhcpPortCtrlOperation 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 15 5 5 1 2 Integer32 Read write Here the DHCP relay agent at this port can be activated or deactivated DHCP relay agent at this port deactivated 1 DHCP relay agent at this port activated 2 4 122 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 16 Configuration and diagnostics 4 4 Management via local V 24 RS 232 communication interface 4 4 1 General function A local communication connection can be established to an external management station via the V 24 RS 232 interface in Mini DIN format Use the PRG CAB MINI DIN programming cable Order No 2730611 The communication connection is established using a corresponding emulation between the switch and a PC e g HyperTerminal under Windows and enables access to the user interface The reference potentials of the V 24 RS 232 interface and the supply voltage are not electrica
80. reserve available the received optical power is below the required minimum value flWorkNetPortPofScrjlfSupplyVoltage OID Syntax Access Description 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 2 4 1 4 Integer32 0 65 Read This object provides the current supply voltage of the transceiver at this port in O 1 V incre ments possible range 0 V to 6 5 V flWorkNetPortPofScrjlf TXxPower OID Syntax Access Description 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 2 4 1 6 Integer32 0 6553 Read This object provides the current transmission power of the transceiver at this port in 0 1 yW increments possible range 0 W to 0 006553 W flWorkNetPortPofScrjlfRxPower OID Syntax Access Description 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 2 4 1 7 Integer32 0 6553 This object provides the current receiving power of the transceiver at this port in 0 1 WW in crements possible range 0 W to 0 006553 W flWorkNetPortPofScrjlfSystemReserve OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 2 4 1 8 4 86 6874 16 Configuration and diagnostics Syntax Integer32 0 255 Access Read Description Provides the remaining system reserve in 0 1 dB increments flWorkNetPortPofScrjlfRxPowerHighAlarm OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 2 4 1 9 Syntax Integer Access Read Description This object indicates whether the RX power high alarm has been triggered Alarm not triggered 1 A
81. that has originated the DHCP Request or DHCP Offer The option 82 field will Circuit ID in the format Oxaaaabbbb 4 Byte where is the WLAN ID the client is located in and Oxbbbb is the portnumber the client is attached to The option 82 field wil also the Remote ID of this switch which can on your choice be its MAC Address or its IP Address Please note that the DHCP Relay Agent can not be used together with IP address assignment by the DHCP Client function see General Configuration IP Configuration Enter password Figure 11 1 Relay Agent web page The DHCP Relay Agent function and IP address assignment via DHCP cannot be activated at the same time 11 2 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 16 Technical data and ordering data 12 Technical data and ordering data 12 4 Technical data 12 1 1 General data Function Switch principle Address table SNMP Transmission capacity per port 64 byte packet size half duplex Supported MIBs Housing dimensions width x height x depth in mm Head station Head station with one extension module Head station with two extension modules Permissible operating temperature Permissible storage temperature Degree of protection Protection class according to EN 61131 2 IEC 61131 2 Laser protection fiber optic interface modules Humidity Operation Storage Air pressure Operation Storage Mounting position Connection to prote
82. the timeout rules For example if no more membership reports are received if the associated port is deleted from the groups or if no port other than the ports receiving queries is a member of the group this group is deleted 7 10 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 16 FL SWITCH MM HS Virtual Local Area Network VLAN 8 FLSWITCH MM HS Virtual Local Area Network VLAN VLAN 8 1 Basics A VLAN is aclosed network which is separated logically functionally rather than physically from the other networks A VLAN creates its own broadcast and multicast domain which is defined by the user according to specified logical criteria VLANs are used to separate the physical and the logical network structure Data packets are only forwarded within the relevant VLAN members of a VLAN can be distributed over a large area The reduced propagation of broadcasts and multicasts increases the available bandwidth within a network segment In addition the strict separation of the data traffic increases System security A router or similar Layer 3 device is required for data traffic between VLANs For the switch the VLANs can be created statically or dynamically For dynamic configuration the data frames are equipped with a tag A tag is an extension within a data frame that indicates the VLAN assignment If configured correspondingly this tag can be added or removed again from the last tag during the transmission of the first swit
83. the current standard Terms and Conditions of Phoenix Contact apply exclusively in par ticular as concerns any warranty liability This manual including all illustrations contained herein is copyright protected Any changes to the contents or the publication of extracts of this document is prohibited Phoenix Contact reserves the right to register its own intellectual property rights for the product identifications of Phoenix Contact products that are used here Registration of such intellectual property rights by third parties is pro hibited Other product identifications may be afforded legal protection even where they may not be indicated as such PHOENIX CONTACT Table of contents Table of contents 1 Modular Managed Switch System MMS and the Managed Compact Switch MCS 1 1 1 1 Properties C 1 1 1 2 Future proof networks for the highest possible requirements 1 1 1 2 1 System components MMS 2 1 3 1 2 2 MMS firmware versions and their functions 1 5 1 2 3 Firmware functions and the required hardware MMS 1 7 1 2 4 Device view nennen nnne nes 1 7 1 2 5 Dimensions of the Modular Managed Switch System for normal operation eem 1 10 1 2 6 Dimensions of the Modular Managed Switch System for GL certified operation 2 1 11 1 2 7 Assignment of ports to 5101 em 1 11 1 3 St
84. tightening the screw collar 68740017 e Figure 3 9 Connecting the F SMA connectors 3 3 2 4 POF connection between devices When connecting two POF interface modules note the signal direction of the fiber optics The fiber connection is always from the transmitter to the receiver q s p j RX RX o Max 50m TX TX TX LO RX TX TX Max 50 m TX 4 4 4 Figure 3 10 3 3 2 5 Reducing the transmission power NOTE In polymer fiber optic paths POF 20 m the transmission power must be reduced Slide the switch on the top of the interface module to the OFF position Note the assignment of port numbers The switch position can be read in WBM or via SNMP 6874_ _16 3 13 Product designation 68740019 Figure 3 11 Assignment of F SMA ports to the DIP switch 3 14 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 16 Startup and functions 3 3 3 FL IF 2HCS 100 Hot plugging When inserting and rem
85. to a deactivated termination device is also considered a cable interrupt as the connected device cannot send a link test pulse because it is switched off FarEnd Fault Detection indicates that the connection in the direction of the partner is not OK the partner does not indicate a link and therefore at least one fiber within the fiber optic cable is faulty or has not been assembled correctly 6874 en 16 PHOENIX CONTACT 3 17 Product designation 3 3 4 3 Connecting the SC D connectors To prevent dirt from entering the connectors do not remove the dust protection caps until just before connecting the connectors The same applies for the protective caps on the connectors 68740020 Figure 3 14 Connecting the SC D connectors 3 3 4 4 Fiber optic connection between devices When connecting two fiber optic interface modules note the signal direction of the fiber optics The fiber connection is always from the transmitter to the receiver The SC D SCRJ connectors which are connected using a support are keyed to ensure that the assignment of the transmit and receive direction is correct
86. up to four FL IF POF SCRJ D interface modules at the same time the arrangement according to Section Arrangement of the interface modules on page 2 7 must be observed Make sure that only one memory module is inserted If more than one module is inserted the switch indicates error code 87 on the display Remove all but one of the memory modules and restart the switch The interface module has two twisted pair interfaces in addition to the parameterization memory To distinguish it from other 2TX interface modules it is supplied in charcoal gray housing The parameterization memory is used to store device data which is modified by the user and stored retentively The memory module is supported by firmware Version 2 03 or later Firmware Versions 2 03 treat the memory module as a standard FL IF 2TX VS RJ The use of memory modules requires the application of system bus firmware 4 20 or later in the head station The system bus firmware for your head station is displayed on the Device Information General web page Hot plugging When inserting and removing interface modules you do not have to switch off the supply voltage The interface modules are detected automatically and logged to the network management If the module is removed when saving the configuration is not saved The saving procedure is finished as soon as the display no longer indicates SC or when the status Current Configuration was
87. well as the IP address the device name of neighboring devices and the device type LLDP general The Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP according to 802 1ab is used by network devices to learn and maintain the individual neighbor relationships Function A network infrastructure component transmits a port specific BPDU Bridge Protocol Data Unit which contains the individual device information at the Message Transmit Interval to each port in order to distribute topology information The partner connected to the relevant port learns the corresponding port specific neighbors from these BPDUs The information learned from the BPDUs is saved for a defined period of time as the TTL value TTL Time To Live Subsequent receipt of the same BPDUs increases the TTL value again and the information is still saved If the TTL elapses the neighbor information is deleted A MMS MCS manages a maximum of 50 items of neighbor information all other information is ignored If several neighbors are displayed on one switch port then there must be at least another switch hub installed between this switch and the neighbor indicated which LLDP does not support or has not activated He me 6874_en_16 PHOENIX CONTACT 10 1 FL SWITCH HS Link Layer Discovery Protocol Table 10 1 Event table for LLDP Event Activity of the individual LLDP agent Response of the neigh boring LLDP agent softw
88. 0 00 00 Address Description MAC Address Admin PC 00cd52182110 Touch Panel 00 0 45 10 4 48 Address 3 00 00 00 00 00 00 Adcross 4 000000000000 Address 5 00 00 00 00 00 00 Address 00 00 00 00 00 00 Address 00 00 00 00 00 00 Illegal Address Counter 0 Current Security State Ok The port security is disabled You find the global port security status at the web page Services Enter password Port Configuration of port 7 General Security PoE R ISTP VLAN Figure 4 40 Port Security web page 6874 en 16 PHOENIX CONTACT 4 33 FL SWITCH MM HS a The Unlock button can be used to disable the port block Last Source MAC Address indicates the last MAC address that accessed the port If the port is blocked the MAC address responsible for the block is indicated here Ports Port PoE Table menu This menu displays the available PoE status information for each port Power over Ethernet Port Table PoE operational Module Interface Port PoE fault status status No PoE enabled 1 powered device connected to x1 this port 2 No fault detected Class 3 device No PoE enabled 3 powered device s connected to this port No PoE enabled 4 powered device HS connected to this port Missing 48 supply fault Missing supply fault
89. 0 600 800 Number of entries in the MAC address table Figure 5 10 Switch over times for a maximum ring with 57 switches 5 2 2 Connection failure Example The following diagram illustrates an RSTP ring with six switches where switch 1 is the root The ring extends over port 1 and port 2 for each switch On switch 4 the loop is broken by a blocking port If a cable interrupt occurs at the point indicated by the star this produces the following entries on the RSTP Fast Ring Detection web page Switch 3 Failed on Port A Switch 4 Broken 6874 en 16 PHOENIX CONTACT 5 11 FL SWITCH MM HS In addition switch 3 would also generate the fIWorkLinkFailure trap as long as the sending of traps is not disabled E eeee fii e a 687407052 Figure 5 11 Connection failure with RSTP ring detection 5 12 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 16 FL SWITCH HS Rapid Spanning Tree 5 2 3 Mixed operation of RSTP and STP If a device with STP support is integrated int
90. 02 1w 5 1 General function When operating MRP Media Redundancy Protocol make sure that R STP is disabled on the ports that are configured as MRP ring ports The Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP is a standardized method IEEE 802 802 1w IEEE 802 1d that enables the use of Ethernet networks with redundant data paths Ethernet networks with redundant data paths form a meshed topology with impermissible loops Due to these loops data packets can circulate endlessly within the network and can also be duplicated As a consequence the network is usually overloaded due to circulating data packets and thus communication is interrupted The meshed structure is thus replaced by a logical deterministic path with a tree structure without loops using the Spanning Tree algorithm In the event of data path failure some of the previously disconnected connections are reconnected to ensure uninterrupted network operation The Rapid Reconfiguration Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP is a standardized method IEEE 802 1w that enables the use of Ethernet networks with redundant data paths and prevents the long timer controlled switch over times of STP Usually the formal term Rapid Reconfiguration Spanning Tree is not used rather just Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol 5 In the following network topology six redundant paths have been created to ensure access to all network devices in the event of a data path fa
91. 3 4 4 hosts 1 3 6 1 2 1 16 4 1 hostControlTable 1 hostControlEntry 1 hostControllndex 2 hostControlDataSource 3 hostControlTableSize 4 hostControlLastDeleteTime B hostControlOwner 6 hostControlStatus 2 hostTable 1 hostEntry Td hostAddress 2 hostCreationOrder 3 hostIndex hostlnPkts 5 hostOutPkts eme es 4 56 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874_en_16 Configuration and diagnostics 6 hostInOctets 7 hostOutOctets 8 hostOutErrors 9 hostOutBroadcastPkts 10 hostOutMulticastPkts 3 hostTimeTable 1 hostTimeEntry 1 hostTimeAddress 2 hostTimeCreationOrder 3 hostTimelndex 4 hostTimelnPkts 5 hostTimeOutPkts 6 hostTimelnOctets 7 8 9 10 a el 7 hostTimeOutOctets 8 hostTimeOutErrors 9 hostTimeOutBroadcastPkts 10 hostTimeOutMulticastPkts 4 8 5 hostTopN 1 3 6 1 2 1 16 5 1 hostTopNControlTable 1 hostTopNControlEntry 1 hostTopNControllndex 2 hostTopNHostlNdex 3 hostTopNRateBase 4 hostTopNTimeRemaining 5 hostTopNDuration 6 hostTopNRequestedSize 7 hostTopNGrantedSize 8 hostTopNStartTime 9 hostTopNOwner 10 hostTopNStatus 2 hostTopNTable 1 hostTopNEntry 1 hostTopNReport 2 hostTopNIndex 3 hostTopNAddress 4 hostTopNRate 4 3 4 6 matrix 1 3 6 1 2 1 16 6 1
92. 4 2 General Multicast Configuration web page 7 8 7 5 Multicast source 7 9 7 5 1 Properties of multicast source detection 7 9 8 Virtual Local Area Network VLAN 8 1 8 1 BASICS s tet cuspide diese A eden ne da 8 1 8 2 Enabling the VLAN web pages in web based management 8 1 6874 en 16 PHOENIX CONTACT iii FL SWITCH HS FL SWITCH MCS 8 2 1 Management 4 04 40444 4 8 2 8 2 2 Changing the management VLAN ID eee 8 2 8 3 General VLAN 2 nennen 8 3 8 4 Current VEANS rae dis cene e E teer HERE ge E De ca 8 4 8 4 1 Static itio cett oret eerie a tr te ae 8 5 8 4 2 VLAN Port Configuration 8 6 8 4 8 VLAN Port Configuration Table 20 8 6 8 5 Creating statio VEANS e ORE RUE ER s 8 7 8 5 1 Dynamic configuration sese een 8 9 8 6 MEAN and TP der pne Ode Retos 8 9 9 Operating as a PROFINET endete ena quide Gal e Ru Eos PERLE 9 1 9 1 Preparing the switch for PROFINET mode 9 1 9 2 Switch as a PROFINET 9 2 9 2 1 Configur
93. 5 Error 6 fIWorkFWCtrlAutoUpdate OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 4 7 Syntax Integer Access Read and write Description This object can be used to trigger the firmware update with subsequent restart No firmware update 1 Execute firmware update fIWorkFWCtrlConf OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 5 fIWorkFWCtrlConfStatus OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 5 1 Syntax Integer Access Read Description This object can be used to request the status of the active device configuration Configuration OK Configuration corresponds to the saved configuration 1 Configuration faulty Configuration does not correspond to the saved configuration i e after a restart the Switch could start with another configuration 2 Configuration saved 3 Saving configuration 4 fIWorkFWCtrlConfSave OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 5 2 Syntax Integer Access Read and write Description This object can be used to save the device configuration Do not save configuration 1 Save configuration 2 4 98 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 16 Configuration and diagnostics OID Syntax Access Description OID Syntax Access Description OID Syntax Access Description OID OID Syntax Access Description OID Syntax Access Description fIWorkFWCtrlDefaultUponDelivery 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 5 3 Integer Read and write This object can be used to reset the device to the default settings see Basic settings on page 3 1 It also triggers a restart
94. 5 1 connection on the front Interface module with 1 x twisted pair 10 100 Mbps in RJ45 format and 1 x FLIF TX POF 10 100 D 2832807 1 polymer fiber 10 100 Mbps in F SMA format for connection on the bottom Interface module with 1 x twisted pair 10 100 Mbps in RJ45 format and 1 x FL IF TX HCS 100 D 2832739 1 HCS fiber 100 Mbps in F SMA format for connection on the bottom Interface module with 2 x twisted pair 10 100 Mbps in RJ45 format for FLIF MEM 2TX D 2832483 1 connection on the bottom and parameterization memory Interface module with 2 x polymer fiber 10 100 Mbps in F SMA format for FL IF 2POF 10 100 D 2832852 1 connection on the bottom 6874 en 16 PHOENIX CONTACT 12 9 Product designation Description Interface module with 2 x HCS fiber 100 Mbps in F SMA format for connection on the bottom Interface module with 2 x twisted pair 10 100 Mbps in RJ45 format and Power over Ethernet for connection on the front Interface module with 2 x polymer fiber 10 100 Mbps in SC RJ format for connection on the bottom and optical diagnostics Interface module with 2 x twisted pair 10 100 Mbps in RJ45 format for connection on the bottom and parameterization memory as well as MRP manager function 12 3 2 Order designation FL IF 2HCS 100 D FL IF 2PSE F FL IF 2POF SCRJ D FL IF MEM 2TX D MRM No 24 2750 4 HH Products Description Modular Managed Switch head station Extension module with 4 slots for eight ports Interface
95. 522 2832535 2832483 2832425 2832205 2832344 2832357 Order No 2832700 2832713 Order No 2891055 1652295 2744856 2744571 2744869 2831044 2832166 Pcs Pkt Ordering data for GL certified components GL Certificate Pcs Pkt Pcs Pkt 1 1 m m ER Pcs Pkt 12 10 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874_en_16 Technical data and ordering data Description Patchbox 8 x RJ45 CAT5e pre assembled can be retrofitted Patchbox 6 x RJ45 CAT5e 4 SC RJ glass pre assembled can be retrofitted Angled patch connector with two RJ45 network connections CAT5e including Layer 1 security elements Angled patch connector with eight RJ45 network connections CAT5e including Layer 1 security elements Angled patch connector with two RJ45 network connections CAT5e Angled patch connector with eight RJ45 network connections CAT5e Angled patch connector with two RJ45 network connections CAT6 Angled patch connector with eight RJ45 network connections CAT6 Patch cable CAT5 pre assembled 0 3 m long Patch cable CAT5 pre assembled 0 5 m long Patch cable CAT5 pre assembled 1 0 m long Patch cable CAT5 pre assembled 1 5 m long Patch cable CAT5 pre assembled 2 0 m long Patch cable CAT5 pre assembled 3 0 m long Patch cable CAT5 pre assembled 5 0 m long Patch cable 5 pre assembled 7 5 m long Patch cable CAT5 pre assembled 10 0 m long Polymer fiber connectors two duplex connectors i
96. 6 Multicast filtering Example In the following table the ports for each switch to which the relevant receivers of the multicast data are connected are indicated with an X See example configuration lt CrossReference gt Figure 7 3 on page 7 6 Table 7 1 Multicast port assignment to the switches Switch 1 Switch 2 Switch 3 Switch 4 Switch 5 Switch 6 Switch 7 Port 1 Port 2 X X X X X X X Port 3 Port 4 X X Port 5 X Port 6 X Port 7 X Port 8 X X 1 Please note that possible redundant paths must be taken into consideration when using Rapid Spanning Tree for multicast group creation 6874 en 16 PHOENIX CONTACT 7 5 FL SWITCH MM HS ap Switch number El Output port number 080057 Receiver Receiver
97. 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 15 1 10 Integer Read and write This object can be used to hide or show the configuration page for the DHCP relay agent in WBM Hide DHCP relay agent configuration page Show DHCP relay agent configuration page default N flSwitchCtriMacTableErase 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 15 1 11 Integer Read and write This object can be used to enable the switch to delete all entries from its MAC address ta ble Do not delete MAC address table Delete MAC address table 2 flSwitchPortMirr 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 15 2 4 116 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 16 Configuration and diagnostics flSwitchPortMirrDestinationPort OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 15 2 1 Syntax Integer32 Access Read and write Description This object can be used to set the port destination port which mirrors the data of another port source port No port mirroring 0 flSwitchPortMirrSourcePort OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 15 2 2 Syntax Integer32 Access Read and write Description This object can be used to set the port source port whose data is to be mirrored to an other port destination port No port mirroring 0 flSwitchPortMirrStatus OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 15 2 3 Syntax Integer Access Read and write Description This object can be used to enable disable port mirroring No port mirroring 1 Port mirroring enabled 2 Port mirroring is disabled if one or both of the flSwitchPortMirrDestinationPort and flSwi
98. AN 5 without Tags Switch 1 Port 1 PVID X Prio X participant VLAN 5 with Tags Device B participant in 5 without Tags Example Communication between termination devices via VLAN For port 7 at switch 1 set the port VLAN ID to 5 and the port priority to any On switch 2 create port 2 and port 3 as tagged members of VLAN 5 Both termination devices now communicate via the network path shown in the example without other switch ports forwarding the broadcast packets for both termination devices for example If additional infrastructure components are located between switch 1 and switch 2 there are two options to ensure communication between the termination devices 8 8 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 16 FL SWITCH MM HS Virtual Local Area Network VLAN 1 Theinfrastructure is also operated in VLAN Tagging mode and VLAN 5 is created based on the relevant devices Result high configuration and maintenance costs 2 GVRP is activated VLAN Tagging mode on all infrastructure components and the information about the created VLANs is transmitted within the network via switch 1 and Switch 2 Result bidirectional data exchange is ensured between termination device A and B 8 5 1 Dynamic configuration On the MMS dynamic VLAN configuration using GVRP can be set for transmission between infrastructure components Here every switch with static or dynamically created VLANs transmits information within the network vi
99. AUTOMATION 222922 eSe2osccoe User manual FL SWITCH MM HS UM E for FL SWITCH MM HS FL SWITCH MCS Modular Managed Compact Switch System DO GD OO GD GD OGD OO GD 10020094 INSPIRING INNOVATIONS User manual Description of the hardware and software functions of the Modular Managed Switch System MMS with firmware Version 4 70a and the Managed Compact Switch MCS with firmware Version 4 72 2012 01 23 Designation FL SWITCH MM HSUME Revision 15 Order No This user manual is valid for see ordering date in chapter 12 The MMS and the MCS with firmware Version 4 70a MMS 4 72 MCS in the Factory Line product range The Modular Managed Switch System includes The FL SWITCH MM HS and FL SWITCH MM HS M head stations The FL MXT and FL MXT M extension modules The various FL IF interface modules The Managed Compact Switch includes The FL SWITCH MCS 16TX and FL SWITCH MCS 14TX 2FX MCS switches The FL MEM PLUG FL MEM PLUG MRM configuration memories 6874 en 15 PHOENIX CONTACT Internet Subsidiaries Published by Please observe the following notes User group of this manual The use of products described in this manual is oriented exclusively to Qualified electricians or persons instructed by them who are familiar with applicable standards and other regulations regarding electrical engineering and in particular the relevant safety concepts
100. Agents reside in all managed network components and transmit the values of specific settings and parameters to the management station On a request from a manager or on a specific event the agent transmits the collected information to the management station Traps Traps are spontaneous SNMP alarm or information messages which are sent by an SNMP compatible device when specific events occur Traps are transmitted with maximum priority to various addresses if required and can then be displayed by the management station in plain text The IP addresses that are to receive these traps trap targets receivers must be set by the user on the relevant device trapPasswdAccess OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 3 0 1 Description Sentto the defined trap receiver on each modification or attempted modification of the de vice password and contains information about the status of the last modification or at tempted modification trapFWHealth OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 3 0 2 Description Sent on each firmware related modification to the diagnostic display and contains addi tional information about the firmware status trapFWConf OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 3 0 3 Description Sent each time the configuration is saved and informs the management station that the configuration has been saved successfully This trap is sent in the event of configuration modifications port name port mode device name IP address trap receiver address port mirroring etc which
101. Always wait until all the LEDs light up after approximately two minutes and the device is available again after booting 4 6 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 16 Configuration and diagnostics It is not ensured that all existing configuration data will be retained after a firmware update downgrade Therefore please check the configuration settings or return the device to the settings default upon delivery NOTE A voltage failure during a firmware update results in the destruction of the firmware on the MMS MCS An update via XMODEM is required see Starting with faulty software firmware on page 4 127 Update Serialnumber 44985038 Actual Firmware Firmware Version 1 00 Hardware Revision 5 00 Bootloader Version fi 00 New Firmware Firmware File Select TFTP Server 0 0 0 0 Change Start Figure 4 9 Update menu In order to enable a firmware update the firmware image must be located in the Download directory of the Factory Manager An application note for firmware update via TFTP AH EN TFTP FIRMWARE UPDATE can be found in the Download Center at www downl phoenixcontact com 8 6874_ _16 4 7 FL SWITCH MM HS a Figure 4 10 Options Properties MMS LX Trap Targets Configuration Diagnostics Ports Extended Options General System Firmware
102. Compare configuration 2 fIWorkFWCtrlConfMemoryModuleCompareStatus OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 5 11 4 Syntax Integer Access Read Description Here the configuration comparison between the MMS MCS and memory module can be requested Unknown 1 Comparison still running 2 Configuration is the same 3 Configuration is not the same 4 Memory module empty 5 fIWorkFWCtrlConfigMemlnfo 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 5 11 5 6874 en 16 PHOENIX CONTACT 4 101 FL SWITCH HS OID Syntax Access Description OID Syntax Access Description OID Syntax Access Description OID OID Syntax Access Description OID Syntax Access Description fIWorkFWCtrlConfigMemConfName 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 5 11 5 1 Octet string Read Here the configuration name of the configuration saved in the memory module can be re quested fIWorkFWCtrlConfigMemFwVersion 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 5 11 5 2 Octet string Read Here the firmware version with which the configuration had been saved can be read fIWorkFWCtrlConfigHemlpAddress 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 5 11 5 3 Octet string Read Here the IP address of the device that saved this configuration can be read fIWorkFWCtrlSerial 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 6 flWorkFWCtrlSerialBaud 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 6 1 Integer Read This object can be used to request the set data transmission rate of the serial interface 2400 baud 1 9600 baud 2 19200 baud 3 38400 baud 4
103. Do not reset to default settings 1 Reset to default settings 2 fIWorkFWCtrlConfName 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 5 4 string 0 64 Read and write Here a descriptive name for the saved configuration can be specified or read fIWorkFWCtrlConfSource 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 5 5 Integer Read Here the storage location of the loaded configuration can be read Configuration loaded from the device 1 Plug in parameterization memory 2 flWorkFWConfig 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 5 10 flWorkFWConfigTftpIPAddr 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 5 10 2 IP address Read and write This object can be used to set the IP address of the TFTP server fIWorkFWConfigTftpFile 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 5 10 3 Octet string 0 64 Read and write This object can be used to set the file name for TFTP transmission 6874 en 16 PHOENIX CONTACT 4 99 FL SWITCH MM HS OID Syntax Access Description OID Syntax Access Description OID Syntax Access Description fIWorkFWConfigStatus 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 5 10 4 Integer Read This object provides information about the last TFTP transmission called Transmission OK 1 Transmission not OK 2 No transmission 3 Unknown 4 fIWorkFWConfigExecute 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 5 10 5 Integer Read and write This object can be used to load or save configuration data No transmission 1 Transmission from server to switch 2 Transmission from switch
104. ED display is set with the function switch Function switch for LEDs The MODE function switch can be used to specify which information is displayed by the second port specific LED The three LEDs above the switch indicate the selected mode This information is then displayed by all port specific LEDs see also example on page 1 13 Connection for extension module FL Connect the first of a maximum of two extension modules here 6874 en 16 PHOENIX CONTACT 1 7 FL SWITCH MM HS Slots for interface modules This is where the various interface modules each with two ports are inserted and locked in place Mini DIN V 24 RS 232 V 24 RS 232 interface in Mini DIN format for local configuration via the serial interface Alarm contact The floating alarm contact can be connected here via a 2 pos COMBICON connector Supply voltage connection The supply voltage can be connected via the 4 pos COMBICON connector redundancy is optional Reset button In order to prevent an accidental MMS reset the reset button must be held down for a few seconds before it triggers a reset Diagnostic display Various operating states or error states can be displayed here For a list of possible Codes please refer to page 1 14 1 2 4 2 Front view of the extension module Diagnostic status indicators Connection for second extension module outgoing system interface Connection for first extension
105. FX SM added Version 02 Technical data for POF interface added Version 03 Multicast filtering added data for interface modules revised Version 04 Extended multicast filtering added improved handling described for the memory module Version 05 VLAN and RSTP added as well as new interface modules and GL certification Version 06 Supplement for Environmental Category 1 added Version 07 08 Functions and new features of firmware Version 4 0 and interface modules extended Version 09 Functions and new features of firmware Version 4 50 interface modules and accessories extended Version 10 Functions and new features of firmware Version 4 60 and MRP interface module extended Version 11 Technical modifications Version 12 Functions and new features of firmware Version 4 70 extended and combined with the MCS manual Version 13 Hint for IGMP Snooping and new fiber optics added 6874 en 16 PHOENIX CONTACT 12 7 Product designation 12 2 Typical current consumption MMS Example Typical module current consumption FL SWITCH MM HS 1 FL 2 FL IF 2TX VS RJ 3 FL IF 2HCS 100 4 FL IF 2FX SM SC or ST 5 including the following revisions FL IF 2FX SC D HW 00 to 04 FL IF 2FX SM SC D HW 00 to 02 FL IF 2FX ST D HW 00 FL IF 2FX SM SC or ST 5 from following revisions FL IF 2FX SC D HW 05 FL IF 2FX SM SC D HW 03 FL IF 2FX ST D HW 01 FLIF TX POF 10 100 6 FLIF TX HCS 100
106. IB2 flWorkBasicDescr OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 1 2 Syntax Display string Access Read and write Description Contains a brief description corresponds to sysDescr from MIB2 4 74 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 16 Configuration and diagnostics OID Syntax Access Description OID Syntax Access Description OID Syntax Access Description OID Syntax Access Description OID Syntax Access Description OID Syntax Access Description flWorkBasicURL 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 1 3 Display string Read Contains the URL of the device specific web page for WBM in the form of the currently set IP address flWorkBasicSerialNumber 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 1 4 Octet string 12 Read Contains the serial number of the device flWorkBasicHWRevision 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 1 5 Octet string 4 Read Contains the hardware version of the device flWorkBasicPowerStat 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 1 6 Integer32 1 1024 Read Contains status information about the connected supply voltages Unknown 1 Supply voltage 1 OK 3 Supply voltage 2 OK 4 Supply voltage 1 and 2 OK 5 flWorkBasicSystemBusversion 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 1 7 Octet string 4 Read Contains the version number for the system bus flWorkBasicCompMaxCapacity 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 1 11 Integer 32 Read Contains the maximum number of interfaces that can be connected 6874 en 16 PHOENIX CONTACT 4 75 FL SWITCH HS f
107. IF modules can be operated in any constellation Operation of the Interface module in FL SWITCH GHS G Gigabit Modular Switches is possible without restriction Interface modules with older hardware status as the above mentioned can be operated in all modular switches Older replacement modules can be ordered according to revision Please contact your Phoenix Contact sales representative Products Description Order designation Order No Pcs Pkt Modular Managed Switch head station FL SWITCH MM HS 2832328 1 Extension module with four slots for eight ports FLMXT 2832331 1 Configuration cable for connecting the switch with a PC V 24 RS 232 PRG CAB MINI DIN 2730611 1 Universal end clamp E NS 35 080088 6 1 Interface module with 2 x twisted pair 10 100 Mbps in RJ45 format for FL IF 2TX VS RJ F 2832344 1 connection on the front Interface module with 2 x twisted pair 10 100 Mbps in RJ45 format for FL IF 2TX VS RJ D 2832357 1 connection on the bottom Interface module with 2 x glass fiber multi mode 100 Mbps in SC formatfor FL IF 2FX SC F 2832412 1 connection on the front Interface module with 2 x glass fiber multi mode 100 Mbps in SC formatfor FLIF 2FX SC D 2832425 1 connection on the bottom Interface module with 2 x glass fiber multi mode 100 Mbps in BFOC ST amp FLIF2FXST D 2884033 1 format for connection on the bottom Interface module with 2 x glass fiber single mode 100 Mbps in SC formatfor FL IF 2FX SM SC D F 283220
108. IP parameters IP address 0 0 0 0 Subnet mask 0 0 0 0 Gateway 0 0 0 0 BootP is activated as the addressing mechanism All available ports are activated with the following parameters Auto negotiation 100 Mbps full duplex for FX glass fiber modules and HCS ports All counters of the SNMP agent are deleted The web and Telnet server SNMP agent and V 24 RS 232 interface are active Port mirroring Rapid Spanning Tree MRP access control for web interface port security multicast filtering VLAN DHCP relay agent option 82 and LLDP are deactivated Port security is deactivated for all ports Access control for WBM is deactivated alarm contact only opens in the event of non redundant power supply and a detected PoE error transmission of SNMP traps is deactivated and the switch has no valid trap destination IP address The aging time is set to 40 seconds The switch is in Ethernet mode default settings WBM refresh interval is set to 30 seconds Managementis VLAN 1 TheSNTP function automatic setting of the system time is deactivated PROFINET and Ethernet IP are deactivated The aging time is set using the dottdTpAgingTime MIB object OID 1 3 6 1 2 1 17 4 2 The available setting range is 10 825 seconds For static configuration an aging time of 300 seconds is recommended During switch restart the active configuratio
109. ITCH SOFTWARE USING XMODEM PROTOCOL ENTER CONTINUE BOOTING PxC MMS systemprompt 68740010 Figure 4 55 Scre16en displayed on HyperTerminal when booting If the device firmware is faulty the following message appears gt Phoenix Contact Modular Managed Switch System lt Phoenix Contact GmbH amp Co KG www phoenixcontact com Press any key to stop booting TE continues SOFTWARE IMAGE CORRUPTED YOU HAVE TO UPDATE THE SOFTWARE USING XMODEM PROTOCOL ENTER TO DOWNLOAD SWITCH SOFTWARE USING XMODEM PROTOCOL ENTER TO CONTINUE BOOTING PxC MMS systemprompt gt 68740024 Figure 4 56 Selection menu for faulty firmware 6874_en_16 PHOENIX CONTACT 4 127 FL SWITCH MM HS Press a to download the new software The following message appears gt Phoenix Contact Modular Managed Switch System lt Phoenix Contact GmbH amp Co KG www phoenixcontact com ENTER TO DOWNLOAD SWITCH SOFTWARE USING XMODEM PROTOCOL ENTER TO CONTINUE BOOTING PxC MMS systemprompt gt a Downloading firmware image with XMODEM over serial port XMODEM Receive Waiting for Sender 68740025 Figure 4 57 XMODEM ready The switch is now ready forthe new firmware In HyperTerminal select Send File from the Transmission menu Folder Filename EFimwareNS witchNMMS xx bin Browse Protocol
110. Options Enable Web based Management Enable Port Mirroring af Port that is mirrored source 7 Port that serves as mirror target Options menu Two functions are available for selection A Activate deactivate the web server Configure the port mirroring function If ports are set with the same value for the source and destination port mirroring will be disabled The source port is set to O Enter the destination port in the relevant multicast group in order to enable multicast packets to be received at the set destination port 4 8 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 16 Configuration and diagnostics Extended Options Properties MMS Port configuration IP configuration Figure 4 11 Extended Options menu You can jump straight to the web interface from here via a selection menu The relevant function is described in Web based management WBM on page 4 10 and onwards Configuration Properties MMS Figure 4 12 Configuration menu Various options are provided here for saving or loading the configuration 6874 en 16 PHOENIXCONTACT 4 9 FL SWITCH MM HS Online diagnostics a 6 6 4 2 Web based management WBM Most of the screenshots shown in Section 4 2 Web based management WBM are for the MMS WBM for the MCS has the same configuration options however the information reg
111. Ports 2 we wa 5 dot1qVLANCurrentUntaggedPorts 6 dot1qVLANStatus 7 dot1qVLANCreationTime 3 dot1qVLANStaticTable 1 dot1qVLANStaticEntry 1 dot1qVLANStaticName 2 dot1qVLANStaticEgressPorts 3 dot1qVLANForbiddenEgressPorts 4 dot1qVLANStaticUntaggedPorts 5 dot1qVLANStaticRowStatus 4 dot1 qNextFreeLocalVLANIndex 5 qPortVLANTable 1 dot qPortVLANEntry 1 dot qPvid 2 dotiqPortAcceptableFrameTypes 3 doti qPortIngressFiltering 4 dot1qPortGvrpStatus 5 dot1 qPortGvrpFailedRegistrations 6 dot1qPortGvrpLastPduOrigin 6 dot1 qPortVLANStatisticsTable dot1 qPortVLANStatisticsEntry dot1qTpVLANPortinFrames 2 dot1qTpVLANPortOutFrames 3 dott qTpVLANPortInDiscards 4 qTpVLANPortInOverflowFrames 5 dott qTpVLANPortOutOverflowFrames ot 2 6 dot1qTpVLANPortInOverflowDiscards 7 dot qPortVLANHCStatistics Table 1 qPortVLANHCStatisticsEntry 1 dot1 qPortVLANHCInFrames 2 dot1 qPortVLANHCOutFrames 3 dott qPortVLANHCIn Discards 8 dot1 qLearningConstraints Table dot1 qLearningConstraintsEntry se 1 1 dot1 qConstraintVLAN 4 64 PHOENIX CONTACT Configuration and diagnostics 2 dot1qConstraintSet 3 dot1 qConstraintType 4 dot1qConstraintStatus 9 dot qConstraintSetDefault 10 dot1 qConstraintTypeDefault 4 3 7 2 qBri
112. Switch 7 Priority 40000 687409059 Figure 5 14 Example topology The loops in the example topology illustrated are disabled by active RSTP components The example topology contains three rings the root and the backup root are components in each of the three rings The three rings do not affect one another a modification to the topology in one ring does not affect the topology of the other two rings 6874 en 16 PHOENIX CONTACT 5 17 FL SWITCH HS Rule 3 No more than ten active Spanning Tree components in the topology when using Spanning Tree default settings The ability to disintegrate any topology to form a tree without loops requires a complex protocol that works with several variable timers These variable timers are dimensioned using IEEE standard default values so that a topology with a maximum of ten active Spanning Tree components always results in a stable network When using large tree please note the following see also Section Large Tree Support on page 5 5 In the large tree support RSTP topology do not use devices that do not support large tree support Enable the large tree support option on all devices If RSTP is to be activated as the redundancy mechanism in an existing network with more than seven switches along the relevant path then the large tree support option must first be enabled on all devices Itis recommended that large tree support is not activated in networks with less than seve
113. T 6874 en 16 Configuration and diagnostics OID Syntax Access Description fIWorkFWCtrllfCounters 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 1 11 Integer Read and write You can reset the statistic values here for all counters from all ports Not deleted 1 Delete counter fIWorkFWCtrlTrapDest 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 2 fIWorkFWCtrlTrapDestTable 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 2 1 flWorkFWCtrlTrapDestEntry OID Syntax Access Description 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 2 1 1 Generates table with the IP addresses of the trap managers fIWorkFWCtrlTrapDestlndex OID Syntax Access Description 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 2 1 1 1 Integer32 1 1024 Read Contains the index of the target component which should receive the traps flWorkFWCtrlTrapDestIPAddr OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 2 1 1 2 Syntax IP address Access Read and write Description Contains the IP address of the target component which should receive the traps fIWorkFWCtrlTrapDestCapacityMax OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 2 2 Syntax Integer32 Access Read Description Contains the maximum permissible number of trap receivers flWorkFWCtrlTrapDestEnable OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 2 3 6874_en_16 PHOENIX CONTACT 4 93 FL SWITCH HS Syntax Access Description OID Syntax Access Description OID Syntax Access Description Integer Read and write This object can be used to disable the
114. TCH MM HS 2 5 Mounting and removing the FL M LABEL labeling field accessories The FL M LABEL labeling field Order No 2891055 can be used to individually identify the ports of the switch The labeling field can be attached to the top of the device orto the MMS extension modules 17 2 kod 17 rapi LNK MODE LNK MODE LNK MODE LNK MODE PHCENIX ACT 100 FD 1m 1m cu imo imo CONTACT 2m ES 2m 2m 2m FL SWITCH MM HS x a a a a zx S 28 32326 ES d E 7 O Reset Ya 5 ri mus 00A0451BDD EHI Fail H O US1 GND US2 GND Ri R2 24 o 222227 e e im gt Figure 2 11 Head station with labeling field Se e O B G Q 9 o 0 5 0 0 A 2 5 1 Mounting Push the expansion plug through the mounting holes and into the openings on the top of the MMS A Press down on the expansion plug cap to secure the plug B
115. The corresponding VLAN ID must be set for the ports that are untagged members of a VLAN see Example Communication between termination devices via VLAN on page 8 8 Only IDs of existing VLANs can be set as the port VLAN ID If a VLAN is deleted all port VLAN IDs that are set to this VLAN are reset to the default VLAN ID 1 8 4 3 VLAN Port Configuration Table This web page provides an overview of the main VLAN settings for the ports Clicking on the relevant port number opens the VLAN Port Configuration web page where the settings can be modified This table can be used to assign incoming packets to the created VLANs if the packets reached the port without VLAN tag 8 6 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 16 FL SWITCH MM HS Virtual Local Area Network VLAN Vlan Port Configuration Table Module Interface Port PVID Prio Ingress Filtering 1 1 7 disable x1 2 1 ov disable 3 v ov disable x2 4 v 5 HS 5 v Ov disable x3 6 v ov disable in 1 disable x4 8 1 ov disable This table indicates what Port VLAN ID and Priority wil be assigned to any untagged data coming in each port Enter password Apply Figure 8 4 VLAN Port Configuration Table menu 8 5 Creating static VLANs Security recommendation Instead of using VLAN 1 for management it is recommended that a new separate VLAN i
116. US1 US2 redundant Connection Nominal value Permissible voltage ranges Test voltage Typical current consumption on US at 24 V DC Typical power consumption Interfaces Number of Ethernet ports V 24 RS 232 communication interface Connection format Ethernet interface SC multi mode for FL SWITCH MCS 14TX 2FX only Number Connection format Wavelength Laser protection Minimum transmission length including 3 dB system reserve Average dynamic transmission power fiber type in link mode Minimum Maximum Static transmission power fiber type Minimum Maximum Minimum receiver sensitivity Maximum overrange Transmission speed Floating alarm contact Voltage Current carrying capacity Cable lengths Twisted pair Perpendicular to a standard DIN rail Snapped onto a grounded DIN rail 1000 g typical Via COMBICON conductor cross section 2 5 mm maximum 24 V DC SELV PELV 18 5 V DC to 30 5 V DC 500 V DC for one minute 600 mA FL SWITCH MCS 16TX 800 mA FL SWITCH MCS 14TX 2FX 15 W FL SWITCH MCS 16 20W FL SWITCH MCS 14TX 2FX 16 Mini DIN female connector 2 SC duplex female connector on the switch 1300 nm Class 1 according to DIN EN 60825 1 2001 11 6 4 km glass fiber with F G 50 125 0 7 dB km F1200 2 8 km glass fiber with F G 50 125 1 6 dB km F800 10 km glass fiber with F G 62 5 125 0 7 dB km F1000 3 0 km glass fiber with F G 62 5 125 2 6 dB km F600 23 5 dBm 50 125 um 20 dBm 62 5 125
117. WCtrlSecurity OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 8 flWorkFWCtrlSecurityAccess 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 8 1 fIWorkFWCtrlSecurityAccessTable flWorkFWCtrlSecurityAccessEntry OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 8 1 1 1 flWorkFWCtrlSecurityAccessIndex OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 8 1 1 1 1 Syntax Integer32 Access Read Description Shows the index of the entry in the access table flWorkFWCtrlSecurityAccessAddr OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 8 1 1 1 2 Syntax IP address Access Read and write Description Indicates the IP address of the devices that have access rights for this switch flWorkFWCtrlSecurityAccessDescr OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 8 1 1 3 Syntax Octet string 0 32 Access Read and write Description Displays the description of the client that has access rights flWorkFWCtrlSecurityAccessRight OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 8 1 1 4 6874_en_16 PHOENIX CONTACT 4 105 FL SWITCH HS Syntax Integer Access Read and write Description Displays the access rights of the relevant client Read only access 1 Read write access 2 flWorkFWCtrlSecurityAccessTableCapacityMax OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 8 1 2 Syntax Integer32 Access Read Description Specifies the maximum possible number of entries for access to WBM flWorkFWCtrlSecurityAccessEnable OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 3 1 1 3 Syntax Integer Access Read and write Description Here you can specify whether ac
118. a VLAN IDs The adjacent switches with activated GVRP then create the same VLANs and add the receiver ports of the GVRP BPDUs as tagged ports A BPDU receiver then distributes its own BPDUS to all ports via the dynamically learned VLAN Switch configuration 1 Allswitches must be set to VLAN Tagging mode After saving the configuration a restart is required 2 GVRP must be activated on all switches Since termination devices usually do not support VLAN tags port specific settings must be made at the termination device ports for the infrastructure The switch then adds the corresponding tags to every data packet received at the relevant port If a data packet is to be sent from the termination device port to the termination device the switch removes the VLAN tag first 8 6 VLAN and R STP When using R STP and VLAN simultaneously please note the following R STP is not based on VLANs A R STP creates a loop free topology in the form of a tree structure In the event of static VLAN configuration all possible redundant data paths must be taken into consideration in the configuration All possible backbone ports of the network not the termination device ports must be inserted in all available VLANs as tagged members This ensures that for every possible tree structure that can be generated by R STP every VLAN can be accessed by every switch A typical configuration is illustrated in the following diagram 6874 en 16
119. ad Write C 2 19216581221 WBM Admin Read Only Read Write Ol E 3 0 0 0 0 Allowed address r eee C Read Write Figure 4 22 Access Control for Web Interface web page Due to configuration errors you may accidentally block your own access In this case you can disable access control via the serial interface using the Access Control for Web button Operating Mode menu In this menu select whether the switch is to operate as a PROFINET device For additional information about operation as a PROFINET device see Section 9 Operating as a PROFINET device Operating Mode Default Mod due O Profinet Mode Profinet Activating the mode Profinet the following settings will be done select ip address assignment DCP enable LLDP clear the default System Name like SWITCH SMCS save the configuration execute a reboot Changing from the mode Profinet to an other mode the following settings will be done independently of the setting before selecting the mode profinet a select ip address assignment BootP a replace an empty System Name by the default System Name like FLSWITCHSMCS The settings become effective after saving the configuration and rebooting the device Enter password Apply Figure 4 23 Operating Mode web page 6874 en 16 PHOENIX CONTACT 4 21 FL SWITCH MM HS Config Management General menu This table is used to view all
120. ad and write In IEC 61158 5 10 the structure of the UUID is specified as a numerical ID flWorkFWCtrIMRPConfigDomainName OID Syntax Access Description 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 10 1 1 1 3 Octet string Read and write Contains a descriptive name for this MRP ring default MRP domain fIWorkFWCtrlMRPConfigDomainRole OID Syntax Access Description 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 10 1 1 1 4 Integer Read and write The possible MRP operating modes can be set here MRP not operating 0 MRP operating as client 1 MRP operating as manager 2 Delete operating mode 3 Set operating mode 4 fIWorkFWCtrlMRPConfigDomainManagerPriority OID Syntax Access Description 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 10 1 1 1 5 Integer 0 65535 Read and write Priority of this MRP device if itis an MRP manager Ignored if the device is an MRP client Only use the four most significant bits bits 11 0 are reserved The lower the value the higher the priority default 32768 fIWorkFWCtrlMRPConfigDomainVlanID OID Syntax Access Description 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 10 1 1 1 6 Integer 0 4094 Read and write The VLAN ID is specified here flWorkFWCtrIMRPConfigDomainRingPort1 OID Syntax Access Description 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 10 1 1 1 7 Integer Read and write Specifies the first MRP ring port of this switch 4 110 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 16 Configuration and diagnostics
121. after a few seconds 3 3 9 3 Network connection See FL IF 2TX 5 on page 3 10 and onwards 3 3 9 4 Connecting the 48 V PoE supply voltage Connecting the PoE supply The connector for the PoE supply is located on the bottom of the interface module Please observe the keying on the connector when inserting it The module has a green LED for each port which indicates the PoE mode The LED is active if the PoE supply and a PD powered device are connected The LED flashes if the module is supplied with less than 48 V Figure 3 17 Connecting the PoE voltage connector 3 26 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 16 Startup and functions Connecting the PoE supply Connect the 48 V PoE supply to terminals 1 and 2 The terminals are bridged within the module The bridges are located between terminals 1 and 3 and between terminals 2 and 4 The bridges can be used to supply voltage to a maximum of three additional PoE interface modules The supply voltage to additional PoE interface modules must be supplied by power supply units Internal bridging in the interface module 48 V DC T 687407054 Figure 3 18 Connecting the 48 V PoE supply Table 3 3 Pin assignment of PoE ports Pin Assignment Description Pin Assignment Description 1 RX4 48 V DC Data PoE 5 n C 2 RX 48 V DC Data PoE 4 6 TX 0 V Data PoE 3 TX 0 V Data PoE 7 n C 4 n C 8 n C
122. age 3 10 and onwards 3 3 9 FL IF 2PSE F The PoE interface module is supported by firmware Version 4 0 or later Firmware Versions 4 0 treat the module as a standard RJ45 interface module The module can operate in PoE mode without management and without support from the firmware and hardware system bus see note below No configuration options and no diagnostic data are available connected termination devices are nevertheless supplied with power The use of the PoE interface module requires the application of system bus firmware 5 00 or later in the head station and system bus firmware 4 00 or later in the extension modules If this requirement is not met in the head station or in any extension module then PoE management is not available in the entire system The system bus firmware is displayed on the Device Information General web page 3 24 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 16 Startup and functions PoE management and PoE information are only available if the 48 V supply is connected to the relevant PoE interface module The ports can be used as standard RJ45 ports if there is no connected supply Features of PoE mode Uptotwelve PoE interface modules with a total of 24 ports be operated at the same time in a MMS Configuration is still possible if the interface module is not plugged in or the 48 V supply is not connected PoE management and PoE information are only available if t
123. al intervention by the user The auto negotiation function can be activated deactivated via the web interface Auto crossing There is no need to distinguish between 1 1 and crossover cables as the transmit and receive cables are crossed automatically 1 Auto crossing is only available if auto negotiation is activated Auto polarity The polarity is changed automatically by the switch if a pair of twisted pair receive cables RD and RD are connected incorrectly Line monitoring The switch uses link test pulses according to standard IEEE 802 3 at regular intervals to monitor the connected TP TX cable segments for short circuits and interrupts Ports that are not being used are considered cable interrupts In addition a TP TX path to a deactivated termination device is also considered a cable interrupt as the connected device cannot send a link test pulse because it is switched off 3 3 7 4 Network connection See FL IF 2TX VS RJ on page 3 10 and onwards and FL IF 2HCS 100 on page 3 15 and onwards 3 22 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 16 Startup and functions CM Or e 3 3 8 FL IF 2TX D FL IF MEM 2TX D MRM The function application of the FL IF MEM 2TX D MRM is described in Section Media Redundancy Protocol MRP on page 6 1 NOTE If the FL SWITCH MM HS with two FL MXT extension modules is additionally operated with one FL IF MEM 2TX D memory module and
124. all browser window The display is renewed automatically after two seconds Diagnostics Alarm Contact menu 6874 en 16 PHOENIX CONTACT 4 37 FL SWITCH MM HS you can set whether and for which events the alarm contact be used Alarm Contact Use the alarm Contact Disable Enable closed Event Monitoring Status Power Supply C Disable Enable ok Port Security Disable Enable ok PoE Fault Monitoring C Disable Enable ok See page Port PoE Table to get information about which port s have detected a PoE fauit MRP Ring Failure Disable C Enable failure Only Manager can detect a ring failure Link Monitoring Disable C Enable ok Ports Port Cfg Table Port Table To activate the link monitoring per port see web page Switch Station Information about detected link failures by the link monitoring feature you find in the column Link State at the web page Switch Station Ports Figure 4 44 Alarm Contact web page Click on the Switch Station Ports Port Cfg Table link on the Alarm Contact page in WBM to access the port configuration page Diagnostics Utilization menu Here the network capacity of each individual port is displayed as a bargraph The display is automatically updated according to the refresh interval Utilization Headstation Port
125. an be created in the network using MRP according to IEC 62439 and a redundant connection provided Each ring must contain an MRP manager all other devices in the ring must suFL SWITCH MM HSpport the MRP client function The ring is created using dedicated ports The MRP ports must be configured in the switch management When configured correctly MRP offers a guaranteed maximum switch over time of 200 ms Due to the flexible structure of the MMS or if using the FL SWITCH MCS 14TX 2FX the two required MRP ports can be configured on various interfaces and all transmission media can be used for The redundancy manager is only available with the FL IF MEM 2TX D MRM interface module Order No 2891770 For the MCS the necessary MRP manager function can be implemented with the FL MEM Plug MRM configuration memory Order No 2891275 Please note that MRP is disabled by default upon delivery 6 2 MRP manager For the MMS MCS the MRP manager function is provided by an interface module MEM plug Since the manager function is linked to a replaceable module the following options are available manager module is present MRP Manager mode is not available and cannot be selected Ifa manager function module is inserted during runtime or if it is already present during the boot process MRP Manager mode is available in the user interface or can be accepted manager function module is present during the boot pr
126. ansparent mode the switch ignores the VLAN ID and forwards packets according to their priority alone In Tagging mode the packets are forwarded according to the regula tion Transparent 1 Tagging 2 flSwitchCtrIVLANTagStatus OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 15 1 6 Syntax Integer Access Read Description Displays the current VLAN mode of the switch Transparent 1 Tagging flSwitchCtrlLIdp OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 15 1 7 Syntax Integer Access Read and write Description This object can be used to enable disable the LLDP Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP deactivated 1 LLDP activated 2 Send 3 Receive 4 6874 en 16 PHOENIX CONTACT 4 115 FL SWITCH HS OID Syntax Access Description OID Syntax Access Description OID Syntax Access Description OID Syntax Access Description OID flSwitchCtrIRSTPLargeTreeSupport 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 15 1 8 Integer Read and write When in RSTP large tree mode the number of switches that can be connected to the root can be increased from 7 to 28 switches Up to 7 switches in the root Up to 28 switches in the root 2 flSwitchCtrilHashMode 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 15 1 9 Integer Read and write This object can be used to set the search method for the switch in the MAC address table Optimized search method for randomly saved MAC addresses default 1 Optimized search method for MAC addresses saved in ascending order 2 flSwitchCtrIDhcpRelayAgentUi 1 3
127. anufacturers can specify their own private SNMP objects which are then assigned to a private manufacturer area in the large SNMP object tree Manufacturers are then responsible for their own private enterprise areas i e they must ensure that only one object is assigned to an object ID object name and parameters and can be published If an object is nolonger needed it can be labeled as expired but it cannot be reused with other parameters under any circumstances Phoenix Contact provides notification of ASN1 SNMP objects by publishing their descriptions on the Internet 4 42 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874_en_16 Configuration and diagnostics Reading SNMP objects is not password protected However a password is required for read access in SNMP but this is set to public which is usual for network devices and cannot be modified By default upon delivery the password for write access is private and can be changed by the user SNMP the web interface Telnet and the serial terminal all use the same password which can be changed by the user Another benefit for the user is the option of sending traps using the Simple Network Management Protocol Management Information Base MIB Database which contains all the data objects and variables required for network management Agent An agent is a software tool which collects data from the network device on which it is installed and transmits this data on request
128. arameters Configuration via the BootP protocol default upon delivery Static configuration via the management interfaces DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DCP Discovery and Configuration Protocol Section 4 1 2 on page 4 1 describes the assignment of IP parameters with Factory Manager 2 1 3 2 2 1 Valid IP parameters IP parameters comprise the following three elements IP address subnet mask and default gateway router Valid IP addresses are 000 000 000 001 to 126 255 255 255 128 000 000 000 to 223 255 255 255 Valid multicast addresses are 224 000 000 001 to 239 255 255 255 Valid subnet masks are 255 000 000 000 to 255 255 255 252 Default gateway router The IP address of the gateway router must be in the same subnetwork as the address of the switch 3 2 2 2 Assigning IP addresses The IP address is a 32 bit address which consists of a network part and a user part The network part consists of the network class and the network address There are currently five defined network classes Classes A B and C are used in modern applications while Classes D and E are hardly ever used It is therefore usually sufficient if a network device only recognizes Classes A B and C Bit 1 gt Bit 32 61462056 Figure 3 2 Position of bits within the IP address 3 4 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874_en_16 Startup and functions With binary representation of the IP address the
129. arding extension modules does not apply this is specific to the MMS 4 2 1 General function The user friendly web based management interface can be used to manage the switch from anywhere in the network using a standard browser Comprehensive configuration and diagnostic functions are clearly displayed on a graphic user interface Every user with a network connection to the device has read access to that device via a browser Depending on the physical structure of the switch a wide range of information about the device itself the set parameters and the operating state can be viewed Modifications can only be made by entering the valid password By default upon delivery the password is private For security reasons we recommend you enter a new unique password 4 2 2 Requirements for the use of WBM Asthe web server operates using the Hyper Text Transfer Protocol a standard browser can be used Access is via the URL http IP address of the device Example http 172 16 29 112 For full operation of the web pages the browser must support JavaScript 1 2 and cascading style sheets Level 1 We recommend the use of Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 0 WBM can only be called using a valid IP address By default upon delivery the switch has no valid IP address Settings are not automatically saved permanently If the active configuration has not been saved a flashing floppy disk icon appears in the top
130. are not yet saved per manently The trap also provides a warning that if not saved permanently the modifica tions will be lost on a reset 6874 en 16 PHOENIX CONTACT 4 43 FL SWITCH HS OID Description OID Description OID Description OID Description OID Description OID Description OID Description trapPowerSupply 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 3 0 4 Sent each time the redundant power supply fails trapSecurityPort 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 3 0 5 Sent each time disabled MAC address accesses port trapRstpRingFailure 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 3 0 6 Sent in the event of a link interrupt in the redundant RSTP ring trapPofDiagPort 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 3 0 7 Sent each time the status of the POF SCRJ port changes trapPoEPort 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 3 0 8 Sent each time the status of the PoE port changes trapMrpStatusChange 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 3 0 9 MRP manager only Sent each time the status of the MRP ring port changes trapManagerConnection 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 3 0 99 Trap to test the connection between the SNMP agent and the network management sta tion 4 44 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 16 Configuration and diagnostics 4 3 2 Diagram of SNMP management Management station SNMP management 1 _ 4 b Trap receivers SNMP traps Management objects
131. are reset a TTL value of 0 seconds to all ports Activate LLDP agent or de Transmit LLDP BPDUstoall Include sender in the list of vice startup ports neighbors Deactivate LLDP agent or Transmit LLDP BPDUs with Delete sender from the list of neighbors port Link up Send port specific LLDP Include sender in the list of BPDUs neighbors Link down Delete all neighbors for this Timer Message Transmit Interval Cyclic transmission of BPDUs to all ports Update information Aging Time To Live Delete neighbor information Receiving a BPDU froma new neighbor Extend list of neighbors and respond with port specific BPDU Include sender in the list of neighbors Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP Status Message Transmit Interval Message Time To Live Enter password Figure 10 1 Link Layer Discovery Protocol web page Disable 9 Enable 30 5s up to 327685 120s The Message Time ToLive is determined by multiplying the Message Transmit Interval with the Message Transmit Hold Multiplier The Message Transmit Hold Multiplier can only be modified via SNMP The default value is four 10 2 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 16 LLDP Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP Topology LLDP Topology Local Neighbors Port Type Address Device Port 1 21 192 168 0 45 FL SWITCH MM HS E 12 E 192 168 0 3 fl il bk2 quicks port 001 11 192 168 0 5 fl pn i
132. art mode in which the operating state can be changed without WBM Features and fields of application of the MMS and MCS Increased network performance by filtering data traffic Local data traffic remains local The data volume in the network segments is reduced Easy network expansion and network configuration Coupling segments with different transmission speeds Automatic detection of 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps data transmission rate with auto crossing ncreased availability through the use of redundant transmission paths with Rapid Spanning Tree Support of various topologies and meshed structures as well as ring topologies with special ring detection Fast switch over times with RSTP fast ring detection Configuration of switches using web based management SNMP Telnet or locally via a V 24 RS 232 interface Multicast filtering static and dynamic IGMP snooping optional querier function VLAN support according to 802 10 32 VLANs Port security functions Access control for web based management WBM Optimum support of the PROFINET RT and Ethernet IP automation protocols ntegration in PROFINET environments Topology detection using LLDP Link Layer Discovery Protocol Address assignment via BootP DHCP DCP or statically Address assignment using DHCP option 82 relay agent MMS Support of Power over Ethernet PoE MMS Support of POF SCRJ Support of th
133. ass fiber path to a deactivated termination device is also considered a cable interrupt as the connected device cannot send a link test pulse because it is switched off FarEnd Fault Detection indicates that the connection in the direction of the partner is not OK the partner does not indicate a link and therefore at least one fiber within the glass fiber cable is faulty or has not been assembled correctly 6874 en 16 PHOENIX CONTACT 3 19 Product designation e 3 3 5 3 Connecting the ST connectors To prevent dirt from entering the connectors do not remove the dust protection caps until just before connecting the connectors The same applies for the protective caps on the connectors Figure 3 16 Connecting the ST connectors 3 3 5 4 Glass fiber connection between devices When connecting two glass fiber interface modules note the signal direction of the fiber optics The fiber connection is always from the transmitter to the receiver The maximum length of the glass fiber cables depends on the fiber type used 3 3 6 FL IF TX POF 10 100 Hot plugging When inserting and removing interface modules you do not have to switch off the supply voltage The interface modules are detected automatically and logged to the network management 3 3 6 1 Default upon delivery When the interface modules are inserted the auto negotiation and auto crossing
134. ast group address in the destination address field are only transferred according to the routing table Devices that are no longer members of a multicast group log out with a leave message IGMP Version 2 or later and no longer send report messages The router also removes the routing table entry if it does not receive a report message within a specific time aging time If several routers with active IGMP query function are connected in the network they determine among themselves which router performs the query function This depends on the IP address as the router with the lowest IP address continues to operate as the querier and all the other routers no longer send query messages If these routers do not receive a new query telegram within a specific period of time they themselves become queriers again If there are no routers in the network a suitably equipped switch can be used for the query function Please note that the MMS MCS only operates as the IGMP querier in the management VLAN A switch which connects a multicast receiver with a router can read and evaluate IGMP information using the IGMP snooping method IGMP snooping translates IP multicast group addresses into multicast MAC addresses so that the IGMP function can also be detected by Layer 2 switches The switch enters the MAC addresses of the multicast receivers which were obtained from the IP addresses by IGMP snooping in its own multicast filter table Thus the switch filters
135. ast stored configuration save here before Enter password Apply Figure 4 19 Software Update web page During a firmware update the current status is shown on the MMS display 03 Downloading firmware via the network 04 Saving the firmware in the MMS Flash memory 05 The new firmware has been saved successfully Display goes out bo Device is booting and loading new firmware in the RAM Following a firmware update a reset is executed automatically to activate the new firmware Please make sure that the TFTP Server service program is activated in the Factory Manager toolbar You can monitor the download in the Factory Manager message window 25 50 75 100 Always wait until all the LEDs light up after approximately two minutes and the device is available again after booting It is not ensured that all existing configuration data will be retained after a firmware update downgrade Therefore please check the configuration settings or return the device to the settings default upon delivery NOTE A voltage failure during a firmware update results in the destruction of the firmware on the MMS MCS An update via XMODEM is required see Starting with faulty software firmware on page 4 127 4 18 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 16 Configuration and diagnostics a Change Password menu This option can be used to specify the current passw
136. ata telegram When the MMS MCS receives a data telegram it only forwards this data telegram to the port that connects to the specified device if the address could be learned beforehand The devices can learn up to 8000 addresses and store them in a table The switch monitors the age of the learned addresses The switch automatically deletes address entries from its address table that have exceeded a specific age default 40 seconds adjustable from 10 to 825 seconds aging time All learned entries are deleted on a restart A list of detected MAC addresses can be found in the MAC address table see Section Diagnostics MAC Address Table menu on page 4 40 The MAC address table can be deleted via Clear The aging time is set using the dott dTpAgingTime MIB object OID 1 3 6 1 2 1 17 4 2 The available setting range is 10 825 seconds For static configuration an aging time of 300 seconds is recommended oe 6874_en_16 PHOENIX CONTACT 3 31 Product designation 3 4 4 Prioritization The switch supports two priority queues for adjusting the internal packet processing sequence traffic classes according to IEEE 802 1D Data telegrams that are received are assigned to these classes according to their priority which is specified in the VLAN prioritization tag Data packets with values between 0 and 3 in the priority field are low default priority Data packets with val
137. ates the modified parameters and restores access To activate the new addresses following a restart BootP must be activated in the MMS MCS on the IP Configuration page in WBM 6874 16 4 3 FL SWITCH HS Figure 4 4 System menu In this menu you can add additional information in the white fields which will be saved on the MMS MCS This information is also available via SNMP and WBM Diagnostics Properties MMS Figure 4 5 Diagnostics menu enmen 4 4 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874_en_16 Configuration and diagnostics Information about the device status and redundancy is displayed here All the messages for this device are displayed under Messages Ports Properties MMS Headstation 1 Connected 100 MBit TX R45 2 Not Connected TX RJ45 LE Connected 100 MBit POF 100 i Connected 100 MBit POF 100 5 Not Connected TX RJ45 LT Connected 100 MBit TX 2245 8 100 MBit TX RJ45 8 POF 100 Figure 4 6 Ports menu for the MMS Comprehensive information e g from interface types and states through transmission data to port levels is displayed here All information is automatically created and updated Trap Targets Properties MMS 192 168 52 155 192 168 10 1 umm IN ES Figure 4 7 Trap Targets menu 6874 en 16 PHOENIX CONTACT 4 5
138. ation in the engineering 0 9 2 9 2 2 Configuring the switch as a PROFINET IO device 9 4 9 2 3 Configuration via the engineering tool 9 5 9 2 4 PROFINET flashing 9 5 9 2 5 DO VICE NAMING P 9 5 9 2 6 Operating in the PROFINET environment 9 5 9 3 PROFINET alatrmis iio Ed e ey rese e eres 9 6 9 3 1 Alarms in WBM seen ottenere un 9 7 9 4 Process data COMMUNICATION 9 7 9 41 Control id ted 9 8 9 5 PDEV Function 9 9 9 5 1 PROFINET stack and PDEV function sese 9 9 9 6 Conformance according to PROFINET conformance class B 9 10 10 LLDP Link Layer Discovery Protocol Ue pr t ie cadet eat ct ea doe opua 10 1 DM 10 1 10 2 Representation of the topology in an engineering 10 4 WAS DACP tela adgBnE om ae ee iden beet mcus de dne due SEE E 11 1 11 1 Activating the DHCP relay 11 1 12 Technical data and ordering 12 1 12 1 Technical data tee Ere t 12 1 12 1 1 Technical data 12 1 12 1 2 T
139. atus and diagnostic 1 12 1 3 1 LEDs on the switch and the MMS extension module 1 12 1 3 2 Meaning of the 7 segment display MMS 1 14 1 4 Properties MOS litere dece ite eo De ae Manus Ae eee 1 18 1 4 1 Firmware versions and their functions MCS 1 18 1 4 2 Firmware functions and the required hardware MCS 1 21 1 4 3 Dimensions of the 1 21 1 4 4 Device view MCS 1 22 2 Mounting and installation i 2 1 24 Mounting and removing the MMS head station or MCS 2 1 2 2 Mounting and removing extension modules MMS 2 3 2 3 Mounting and removing interface modules MMS 2 5 2 4 Arrangement of the interface 2 7 2 5 Mounting and removing the FL M LABEL labeling field accessories 2 8 2 5 1 Mounting oii see es De eR ce edd Le gov a do 2 8 2 5 2 Removal SB eene 2 9 2 5 3 Dimensions of the labeling field 2 9 2 6 FL MEM PLUG 2 9 2 7 Installing the MMS or 5 2 10 2 7 1 Connecting the supply voltage to the MMS MCS 2 10 2
140. ax Access Description OID Syntax Access Description OID Syntax Access Description OID Syntax Access Description OID Syntax Access Description sysContact 1 3 6 1 2 1 1 4 0 Octet string size 0 255 Read and write The textual identification of the contact person for these managed nodes and information on how this person can be contacted sysName 1 3 6 1 2 1 1 5 0 Octet string size 0 255 Read and write A name for this node assigned by the administrator According to the agreement this is the fully qualifying name in the domain sysLocation 1 3 6 1 2 1 1 6 0 Octet string size 0 255 Read and write The physical location of this node e g Hall 1 3rd floor sysServices 1 3 6 1 2 1 1 7 0 Integer 0 127 Read Indicates a number of services that this device offers The value is the sum of several cal culations For every layer of the OSI reference model there is a calculation in the form of 21 where L indicates the layer For example A node which primarily executes line routing functions has the value 2 3 1 4 A node which is a host and provides application services has the value Ba ly 75 sysORLastChange 1 3 6 1 2 1 1 8 TimeTicks Read Indicates the value of the sysUpTime during the last system modification 4 48 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 16 Configuration and diagnostics sysORTable OID 1 3 6 1 2 1 1 9 Syntax TimeTicks Access Read Descr
141. ays 1 When a reset is triggered display flWorkFWCtrlHttp 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 1 6 rb is indicated in the 6874 en 16 PHOENIX CONTACT 4 91 FL SWITCH HS Syntax Access Description OID Syntax Access Description OID Syntax Access Description OID Syntax Access Description OID Syntax Access Description Integer Read and write This object can be used to disable the web server for the switch The modification only takes effect after a restart Web server enabled Web server disabled 1 fIWorkFWCtrlTelnet 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 1 7 Integer Read and write This object can be used to disable the Telnet function for the MMS MCS The modification only takes effect after a restart Telnet activated 2 Telnet deactivated 1 flWorkFWCirlWebPageRefresh 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 1 8 Integer 0 3600 Read and write Here you can set the refresh time for the automatic update of the web pages in seconds Default 30s No update 05 fIWorkFWCtrISNMP 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 1 9 Integer Read and write Here you can activate deactivate the SNMP agent The modifications take effect following a restart SNMP agent deactivated 1 SNMP agent activated 2 fIWorkFWCtrlOperatingMode 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 1 10 Integer Read and write Pre configuration can be implemented here for PROFINET mode Standard mode default 1 PROFINET mode 2 4 92 PHOENIX CONTAC
142. be disabled according to the port PROFINET alarms and configuration comparison Fastaging on link down 6874 en 16 PHOENIX CONTACT 1 5 FL SWITCH HS Extended LED diagnostics identification of the switch in the PROFINET environment and detection of the Missing IP parameter following restart status PoE traps when the PoE status changes Testtraps to check communication Deletion of the MAC address table from WBM and SNMP Firmware 4 60 offers the following additional functions Support of the Media Redundancy Protocol both as a client and as the manager Extended PROFINET IO device function Support of up to 128 multicast groups of which up to 20 are static groups Firmware 4 70a offers the following additional functions Support of time synchronization using SNTP Support of the PDEV function for the PROFINET environment Support of Smart mode for easily selecting the operating mode 1 6 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 16 The Modular Managed Switch System MMS and the Managed Compact Switch MCS 1 2 3 Firmware functions and the required hardware MMS Table 1 1 Functions and the required hardware Function Required hardware for the Required hardware for the head station extension modules Standard switch Hardware Version gt 3 Hardware Version gt 2 functions includes system bus Version 4 1 includes system bus Version 3 1 Memory module Hardware Versio
143. bs4 quick port 001 Note This web page will be refreshed 26 sec automatically change the interval at the web page Device Configuration User Interfaces Figure 10 2 LLDP Topology web page A table is created for known neighbors and contains the following five columns Local Port Contains the port number of the local switch that is used to connect a neighbor to this Switch The port number is also a link to the local Port Configuration web page Type Anicon is displayed here which corresponds to the neighboring device type Ethernet Device is displayed in general for devices produced by other manufacturers Address Indicates the management IP address for the neighbor Device Indicates the system name of the neighbor ndicatesthe port number of the neighboring switch that is used to connect the neighbor to the local switch If the neighbor is identified as a Phoenix Contact switch the port number is implemented as a link to the Port Configuration web page for the neighbor 6874 en 16 PHOENIX CONTACT 10 3 FL SWITCH HS 10 2 Representation of the topology an engineering too The LLDP information can be represented as such or similarly in engineering tools EthernetTopology Proj Verbindungsmodus aus Notebook PC Figure 10 3 EthernetTopology E E topologie screenshot MCS Middle 5 01 009 001 MCS Bottom Representation of the topology
144. by the switch automatically detects the operating parameters for the connected network and sets the corresponding parameters 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps data transmission rate and half or full duplex transmission mode for its RJ45 ports Automatic port setting eliminates the need for manual intervention by the user The auto negotiation function can be activated deactivated via the web interface 6874 en 16 PHOENIX CONTACT 3 25 Product designation 4 6 Auto crossing There is no need to distinguish between 1 1 and crossover cables as the transmit and receive cables are crossed automatically Auto crossing is only available if auto negotiation is activated Auto polarity The polarity is changed automatically by the switch if a pair of twisted pair receive cables RD and RD are connected incorrectly Line monitoring The switch uses link test pulses according to standard IEEE 802 3 at regular intervals to monitor the connected TP TX cable segments for short circuits and interrupts Ports that are not being used are considered cable interrupts In addition a TP TX path to a deactivated termination device is also considered a cable interrupt as the connected device cannot send a link test pulse because it is switched off The PoE configuration options are also available if no PoE interface module is inserted If a PoE interface module is inserted the configuration is transmitted to the module
145. cManAddrlfSubtype 5 IldpLocManAddrlfld 6 ldpLocManAddrOID 4 IldpRemoteSystemsData 1 IldpRemTable 1 ldpRemTimeMark 2 ldpRemLocalPortNum 3 4 IldpRemChassisType 5 IldpRemChassisld 6 lldpRemPortldSubtype 7 IldpRemPortld 8 9 0 1 8 IlqpRemPortDesc 9 IIdpRemSysName lldpRemSysDesc lldpRemSysCapSupported 12 IldpRemSysCapEnabled 2 IldpRemManAddrTable 1 IldpRemAddrSubSubtype 2 3 IldpRemManAddrifSubtype 4 IldpRemManAddrlfld 5 IldpRemManAddrOID 5 1 1 6874 16 4 69 FL SWITCH HS pnoRedundancy MIB 1 3 6 1 4 1 24686 1 pnoMRPDomainTable 1 pnoMRPDomainEntry 1 pnoMRPDomainIndex 2 pnoMRPDomainUuid 3 pnoMRPDomainName 4 pnoMRPDomainAdminRole 5 pnoMRPDomainOperRole 6 pnoMRPDomainManagerPriority 7 pnoMRPDomainRingPort1 8 pnoMRPDomainRingPort1 State 9 pnoMRPDomainRingPort2 pnoMRPDomainRingPort2State pnoMRPDomainState pnoMRPDomainError pnoMRPDomainRingOpenCount pnoMRPDomainLastRingOpenChange pnoMRPDomainRoundTripDelayMax pnoMRPDomainRoundTripDelayMin 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 pnoMRPDomainResetRoundTripDelays 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
146. ce is also considered a cable interrupt as the connected device cannot send a link test pulse because it is switched off 3 3 1 3 Connecting the RJ45 connectors Insert the RJ45 male connector into the female connector according to the keying until it snaps into place To remove the connector press the snap in device in the direction of the connector A and then remove the connector 68740016 Figure 3 6 Connecting the RJ45 connectors Industrial RJ45 connector with additional latching The figure below shows the VS 08 T G RJ45 IP20 which can be snapped directly onto the interface module Figure 3 7 Using the VS 08 T G RJ45 IP20 6874 en 16 PHOENIX CONTACT 3 11 Product designation 3 3 1 4 Assignment of the RJ45 female connector TP TX n c 8 RJ45 7 TD Pin6 Pind 4 TD T RD Pin2 RD 1 Figure 3 8 Assignment of the RJ45 female connector 3 3 2 FL IF 2POF 10 100 Hot plugging When inserting and removing interface modules you do not have to switch off the supply voltage The interface modules are detected automatically and logged to the network management 3 3 2 1 Default upon delivery When the interface modules are inserted the auto negotiation function is activated but link monitoring for the POF ports is not activated If an interface module is inserted in
147. cess to WBM is regulated via access rights for individual clients or not if no valid IP address is specified without regulation is set automatically Without regulation 1 With regulation 2 fIWorkFWCtrlSecurityPort OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 8 2 fIWorkFWCtrlSecurityPortTable flWorkFWCtrlSecurityPortEntry OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 8 2 1 1 flWorkFWCtrlSecurityPortIndex OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 8 2 1 1 1 Syntax Integer32 Access Read Description Displays the index of the entry in the port list flWorkFWCtrlSecurityPortLastMacAddr OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 8 2 1 1 2 Syntax MAC address Access Read Description Displays the last MAC address that sent frames to this port flWorkFWCtrlSecurityPortMode OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 8 2 1 1 3 Syntax Integer Access Read and write 4 106 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874_en_16 Configuration and diagnostics Description Displays the security mode of the port or modifies it No security mode activated 1 For unauthorized access only trap transmission 2 In the event of unauthorized access the port is blocked 3 In the event of unauthorized access the port is blocked with automatic enabling later on 4 flWorkFWCtrlSecurityPortState OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 8 2 1 1 4 Syntax Integer Access Read and write Description Displays the security state of the port or modifies it Port reenabled OK 1 Port is currently blocked 2 Port is
148. ch Station Device specific configuration and diagnostics 4 2 3 1 General Instructions FL SWITCH MM HS last update 12 11 19 Information Navigate through the Web Based Management by selecting a link in this area or the menu to the left FL SWITCH MM HS General Instructions This page and an overview about the structure of this J General Instructions webside A Device Information Some general information about this Factory Line E Information device E Sitemap General Configuration Password protected pages to configure this Factory Line device Intunmniun Switch Station Information about the switch specific function E Home Homepage of the Factory Line device General Configuration Switch Station Click on the Phoenix Contact logo or name to go to our internet web page UR CHITI EM Your browser must be properly configured and you need internet access for this a Home to function properly Figure 4 13 Information web page for the MMS General Instructions Contains a brief description of WBM and a navigation tree site map which is linked to every page of WBM 6874_en_16 PHOENIX CONTACT 4 11 FL SWITCH MM HS 4 2 3 2 Device Information FL SWITCH MM HS fl switch mm hs200 last update 14 35 30 General Instructions 2 Device Information General Technical Data E Hardware Installation E Local Diagnostics O Serial Port General
149. ch in the transmission chain Several different VLANs can thus use the same switches infrastructure components Alternatively termination devices that support VLAN tags can also be used 8 2 Enabling the VLAN web pages in web based management Activate web based management for the switches e g using the Factory Manager switch to the General Configuration menu then the User Interfaces page Activate the VLAN function and confirm by entering your password When activating VLAN under User Interfaces the VLAN mechanism is not activated In the WBM menu the VLAN page under which the function can be configured and activated is enabled When deactivating the VLAN configuration pages under User Interfaces the VLAN mechanism is not deactivated The saved VLAN configuration is retained 6874 en 16 PHOENIX CONTACT 8 1 FL SWITCH HS ie 85 e i 8 2 1 Management VLAN ID The management of the switch is assigned to VLAN 1 by default upon delivery In addition all ports are assigned to VLAN 1 by default upon delivery This ensures that the network supported management functions can be accessed via all ports Make sure that the MMS MCS is always managed in a VLAN that you can also access VLAN ID 1 cannot be deleted and is thus always created on the switch If you delete the VLAN in which the MMS MCS is managed management is automatically switched to VLAN 1 The
150. ching technology Interface modules provide the interface to the desired physical transmission method An extension module can be used to extend the head station from eight ports to 16 ports and the use of two extension modules gives a maximum of 24 ports The desired transmission medium can be freely selected using the various interface modules Figure 1 1 The Modular Managed Switch System 1 2 Future proof networks for the highest possible requirements 10 100 Mbps polymer HCS fibers on the MMS Easy to assemble polymer fibers can now also be used for Ethernet This cost effective fiber optic technology can cover distances of up to 50 m This provides cost savings both during installation and for maintenance when replacing mechanically damaged fiber optic cables HCS fiber technology is available for distances of up to 300 m 6874 en 16 PHOENIX CONTACT 1 1 FL SWITCH HS Maximum availability All information Port mirroring Modularity PROFINET Maximum network availability A device design that does not use a fan the redundant power supply and conformance with all relevant industrial standards in terms of EMC climate mechanical load etc ensure the highest possible level of availability Redundancy can also be created with standards the Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol or MRP Media Redundancy Protocol ensure the safe operation of the entire network regardless of topology even in the event of a cable interrup
151. ckets Block unknown multicasts at querier Selection as to whether unknown multicast packets are to be blocked on the querier Query port configuration Auto query port FRD MRP Activates the automatic selection of additional query ports by fast ring detection and or MRP Redundant ports are thereby automatically integrated in every multicast group In the event of redundancy switching the multicast packets are not blocked because the ports required are already members of the groups If this function is activated the multicast tables are not deleted during redundancy switching Deletion of the multicast tables is triggered when the auto query ports are deactivated in order to enforce a new multicast group learning process in the event of redundancy switching Static query ports Selection of which ports are static query ports Clear auto detected query ports Deletes the ports automatically assigned to the groups 7 5 Multicast source detection Multicast source detection can be used to create dynamic multicast groups without the multicast receiver membership report sender in the network being active 7 5 1 Properties of multicast source detection The following properties apply if IGMP snooping has previously been activated globally a The switch is not the IGMP querier in the network segment because the querier function is deactivated or another device has assumed the querier role fthe switch receives a
152. ctet string 4 Access Read Description Contains the firmware version as a string Example for Version 3 97 0x33 0x2e 0x39 0x37 fIWorkFWiInfoState OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 1 2 Syntax Octet string 6 Access Read Description Contains the firmware release as a string Example for beta 0x62 0x65 0x64 0x61 flWorkFWInfoDate OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 1 3 Syntax Octet string 6 Access Read Description Contains the creation date of the firmware version as a string Example for 21 05 2001 0x32 0x31 0x30 0x35 0x30 0x31 flWorkFWInfoTime OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 1 4 6874 16 4 89 FL SWITCH HS Syntax Access Description OID Syntax Access Description OID Syntax Access Description OID Syntax Access Description OID Syntax Access Description OID Syntax Access Description Octet string 6 Read Contains the creation time of the firmware version as a string Example for 14 10 20 Ox31 0x34 0x31 0x30 Ox32 0 30 fIWorkFWInfoCopyright 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 1 5 Display string 6 Read Contains the owner of the firmware copyright Copyright by Phoenix Contact GmbH amp Co 2003 flWorkFWInfoBootVersion 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 1 6 Octet string 4 Read Contains the version of the boot loader as a string Example for Version 2 65 0x32 0 2 0x36 0x35 flWorkFWInfoBootState 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 1 7 Octet
153. ctive earth ground Weight of head station Supply voltage US1 US2 redundant Connection Nominal value Permissible voltage range Test voltage Typical current consumption on US at 24 V DC Typical power consumption Technical data MMS Modular Managed Ethernet Fast Ethernet Switch conforms to standard IEEE 802 3 Store and forward 8000 MAC addresses Version 1 and 2c At 10 Mbps 14 880 pps packets per second At 100 Mbps 148 800 pps MIB Il RMON MIB bridge MIB If MIB Etherlike MIB and Phoenix Contact private SNMP objects 214 x 95 x 107 depth from top edge of DIN rail 341 x 95 x 107 depth from top edge of DIN rail 468 x 95 x 107 depth from top edge of DIN rail 0 C to 55 C 20 C to 70 C 20 DIN 40050 IEC 60529 3 Class 1 according to EN 60825 1 10 to 95 no condensation 10 to 95 no condensation 80 kPa to 108 kPa 2000 m above sea level 70 kPa to 108 kPa 3000 m above sea level Perpendicular to a standard DIN rail Snapped onto a grounded DIN rail 1350 g typical Via COMBICON conductor cross section 2 5 mm maximum 24 V DC SELV PELV 18 0 V DC to 32 0 V DC 500 V DC for one minute 0 35 3 25 A depending on configuration extensions interface modules 8 4 W 78 W depending on configuration extensions interface modules see example on page 12 8 6874_en_16 PHOENIX CONTACT 12 1 Product designation Interfaces at the head station Number of slots for
154. currently blocked will be enabled automatically later on 3 If the port continues to receive packages from illegal MAC addresses the port will immediately switch to one of the blocked modes flWorkFWCtrlSecurityPortlllegalAddrCounter OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 8 2 1 1 5 Syntax Gauge32 Access Read Description Specifies the number of unauthorized MAC addresses that have been registered at this port flWorkFWCtrlSecurityPortMacTable flWorkFWCtrlSecurityPortMacEntry OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 8 2 2 1 flWorkFWCtrlSecurityPortMacIndex OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 8 2 2 1 1 Syntax Integer32 Access Read Description Displays the port number flWorkFWCtrlSecurityPortMacAddr OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 8 2 2 1 2 Syntax MAC address Access Read and write Description Displays the authorized MAC addresses for this port flWorkFWCtrlSecurityPortMacDescr OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 8 2 2 1 3 6874 16 4 107 FL SWITCH HS Syntax Access Description Octet string 0 16 Read and write Displays the user description of the MAC address fIWorkFWCtrlSecurityPort flWorkFWCtrlSecurityPortTableCapacityMax OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 8 2 3 Syntax Integer32 Access Read Description Specifies the maximum possible number of entries in the security port table OID Syntax Access Description flWorkFWCtr
155. dgeConformance 1 3 6 1 2 1 17 7 2 1 qBridgeGroups 1 qBridgeBaseGroup 2 qBridgeFdbUnicastGroup 3 qBridgeFdbMulticastGroup 4 qBridgeServiceRequirementsGroup 5 qBridgeFdbStaticGroup 6 qBridgeVLANGroup 7 qBridgeVLANStaticGroup 9 qBridgeVLANStatisticsGroup 10 qBridgeVLANStatisticsOverflowGroup 11 qBridgeVLANHCStatisticsGroup 12 qBridgeLearningConstraintsGroup 13 qBridgeLearningConstraintDefaultGroup 2 qBridgeCompliances 1 qBridgeCompliance 8 qBridgePortGroup 0 1 2 1 1 1 4 3 7 3 dot1dConformance 1 3 6 1 2 1 17 7 3 1 dotidGroups 1 dott dBaseBridgeGroup 2 dot1 BasePortGroup 3 dot1dStpBridgeGroup 4 dot1dStpPortGroup2 5 dot1dStpPortGroup3 6 dot1dTpBridgeGroup 7 dotidTpSdbGroup 8 dotidTpGroup 9 dot1dStaticGroup 10 dot1 dNotificationGroup 2 dotidCompliances 1 BridgeCompliances 1493 2 BridgeCompliances4188 4 3 8 rstp MIB 1 3 6 1 2 1 17 11 4 3 8 1 rstp Conformance 1 3 6 1 2 1 17 11 1 rstp Groups 1 3 6 1 2 1 17 11 1 1 6874 en 16 PHOENIX CONTACT 4 65 FL SWITCH HS 1 rstpBridgeGroups 2 rstpDefaultPathCostGroup 8 rstpPortGroup rstp Compliance Groups 1 3 6 1 2 1 17 11 1 2 1 rstpCompliance 4 66 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874_en_16 Configuration and diagnostics 4 3 9 MIB 1 3 6 1 2 1 30
156. dicates the transmit status of the trap While the sending of traps is activated each trap can be deactivated individually 6874 en 16 PHOENIX CONTACT 4 95 FL SWITCH MM HS OID OID Syntax Access Description OID Syntax Access Description OID Syntax Access Description fIWorkFWCtrlPasswd 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 3 fIWorkFWCtrlPasswdSet 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 3 1 Octet string 2 24 Read and write i For security reasons the response is always with read access A new password can be entered here with a maximum of 12 characters Example Your new password should be factory3 The password must be entered a second time for confirmation Your entry factory3factory3 Your password for write access is now factory3 fIWorkFWCtrlPasswdSuccess 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 3 2 Integer Read A message is displayed which informs you whether the last change of password was suc cessful Not changed 1 Failed 2 Successful 3 Messages 2 and 3 are displayed for approximately ten minutes after the last access after which status 1 not changed is displayed again fIWorkFWCtrlLoginExpire 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 3 3 Integer32 30 3600 Read and write Here the number of seconds between two password entries is specified as a period of time After the time has elapsed the password must be re entered if required Default 300 Range 30
157. e 1 3 6 1 2 1 16 8 1 bufferControlTable 1 bufferControlEntry 1 bufferControllndex 2 bufferControlChannellndex 3 bufferControlFullStatus 4 bufferControlFullAction 5 bufferControlCaptureSliceSize 6 bufferControlDownloadSliceSize 7 bufferControlDownloadOffset 9 bufferControlMaxOctetsGranted 10 bufferControlCapturedPackets 11 bufferControlTurnOnTime 12 bufferControlOwner 13 bufferControlStatus 2 captureBufferTable 1 captureBufferEntry 1 captureBufferControllndex 2 captureBufferlndex 3 captureBufferPacketlD 4 captureBufferPacketData 5 captureBufferPacketLength 6 captureBufferPacketTime 7 captureBufferPacketStatus 8 bufferControlMaxOctetsRequested 0 1 2 1 1 1 D 1I D ID 4 3 4 9 event 1 3 6 1 2 1 16 9 The event group controls the generation of traps when the alarms described above occur 1 eventTable 1 eventEntry 1 2 eventDescription 3 eventType 4 eventCommunity 5 eventLastTimeSent 6 eventOwner 7 eventStatus 1I D IL 2 logTable 1 logEntry 1 2 3 4 logEventindex logindex logTime logDescription BS SS 6874_en_16 PHOENIX CONTACT 4 59 FL SWITCH HS 4 3 5 4 3 5 1 Bridge MIB 1 3 6 1 2 1 17 dotidBase 1 3 6 1 2 1 17 1 The dot1dBase group con
158. e Media Redundancy Protocol MRP both as a client and as the manager in conjunction with the FL IF MEM 2TX D MRM interface module for the MMS or the FL MEM PLUG MRM interface module for the MCS The MRP ring can thus be created using any MMS MCS ports they simply have to be defined 1 2 1 System components MMS The head station is the central element of the Modular Managed Switch System It contains all the management functions and the interface modules provide it with the desired interfaces to the network Up to two extension modules can be connected to a head station which means that the maximum system configuration comprises 24 Ethernet ports 6874 en 16 PHOENIX CONTACT 1 3 FL SWITCH HS FL SWITCH MM HS M D Extension module FL MXT FL MXT M Interface modules Thanks to certification according to Germanischer Lloyd GL Certificate No 2427504 HH the FL SWITCH MM HS M head station the FL MXT M extension module and some of the available interface modules have been approved for shipbuilding and off onshore applications Please observe the list of GL certified components on page 12 9 Please also observe the notes for supply voltage connection on page 2 11 NOTE Always switch off the supply voltage before inserting or removing extension modules FL MXT Do not connect more than two extension modules FL MXT to one head station An extension module provides another 8
159. e command in the status word Byte 0 specifies the action and the new status byte 1 specifies the port number If a command is to apply to all the ports the value OxFF can be sent instead of the port number A command should only be sent once but never in a process data communication cycle Table 9 1 Assignment of the control word Action Status Byte 0 Byte 1 Link monitoring On 0 01 Port or OXFF Off 0x02 Port or OXFF POF SCRJ diagnostics On 0x03 Port or OXFF Off 0x04 Port or OXFF Power supply On 0x05 0x00 Off 0x06 0x00 Interface removed On 0x07 0x00 Off 0x08 0x00 ring failure On 0x09 0x00 Off 0x0a 0x00 Link enable status On 0x20 Port Off 0x21 Port 9 4 1 1 Additional process data The MMS MCS can send the following process data Summary of the link states of all ports three bytes each port corresponds to one bit 0 Link down 1 Link up Byte 0 273301527390 25382330 172530 2038 10233 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Port 8 16 24 7 5 23 6 14 22 5 13 21 4 12 20 3 11 19 2 10 18 1 9 17 The slots send link information for each port This includes Link status 0 Link down 1 Link up Far End Fault status 0 No error 1 Error Port enable status 0 Enabled 1 Disabled Link mode 0 Forwarding 1 Blocking Bit 7 5 9 4 fey 1 0 Meaning Link mode
160. e redundant network does not have to be reconfigured if the link status changes at an edge port 5 8 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874_en_16 FL SWITCH HS Rapid Spanning Tree Admin Edge Port Here you can specify whether this port is to be operated as an edge port default setting if possible Priority Indicates the priority set for this port default 128 Due to backwards compatibility with STP priority values can be set that are not configurable in RSTP Admin Path Cost Indicates the path cost set for this port A path cost equal to 0 activates the cost calculation according to the transmission speed 10 Mbps 100 100 Mbps 19 Path Cost Indicates the path cost used for this port Forward Transitions Indicates how often the port switches from the Discarding state to the Forwarding state Additional parameters provide information about network paths in a stable topology that are used by the BPDU telegrams Designated Root Root bridge for this Spanning Tree Designated Bridge The switch from which the port receives the best BPDUs The value is based on the priority value in hex and the MAC address Designated Port Port via which the BPDUs are sent from the designated bridge The value is based on the port priority 2 digits and the port number Designated Cost It indicates the path cost of this segment to the root switch Protocol Compatibility Protocol Compatibility Port Mode Port is the
161. e startup and if necessary also during topology modification a port passes through the states in the following order Learning gt Forwarding Or Disabled Blocking Discarding Due to the edge property of ports they switch to Forwarding immediately In the second case the port generates a data path interruption in order to suppress loops accordingly At least one port in the Forwarding state is at a data path between two Spanning Tree switches so that the data path can be integrated into the network 5 2 4 3 Fast forwarding If the Spanning Tree Protocol is deactivated at a port the corresponding port is in fast forwarding mode A fast forwarding port gnores all BPDUs that are received at this port Does not send any BPDUs Switches to the Forwarding state immediately after establishing the data link Termination devices connected to this port can be accessed immediately Port STP Status in WBM on the STP Port Configuration page must be set to Disabled to activate fast forwarding 5 14 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 16 FL SWITCH HS Rapid Spanning Tree Frame duplication frames may be changed 5 2 4 4 Due to the fast switch over times of RSTP frames may be duplicated and the order of Enabling via serial interface or Telnet Establish a connection to the switch as described in Section Management via local V 24 RS 232 communication interface on page 4 123 or Secti
162. e switch Twisted pair cable with a conductor cross section of 0 14 mm to 0 22 mm 100 Ohm 10 100 Mbps 100m Firmware Version 4 0 or later System bus firmware 5 00 or later in the head station and System bus firmware 4 00 or later in the extension modules Via conductor cross section 2 5 mm maximum 48 V DC SELV PELV 45 5 V DC to 53 V DC 12 2 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 16 Technical data and ordering data RJ45 interfaces Power over Ethernet IEEE 802 3af Test voltage Maximum current consumption on US at 48 V DC Typical power consumption Ethernet interface SC Multi mode Number Connection format Wavelength Laser protection Minimum transmission length including 3 dB system reserve Average dynamic transmission power fiber type in link mode Minimum Maximum Static transmission power fiber type Minimum Maximum Minimum receiver sensitivity Maximum overrange Transmission speed Ethernet interfaces SC Single mode Number Connection format Wavelength Laser protection Minimum transmission length including 3 dB system reserve Average dynamic transmission power fiber type in link mode Minimum Maximum Minimum receiver sensitivity Maximum overrange Transmission speed Ethernet interfaces POF SMA Number Connection format Data transmission rate Wavelength Minimum cable length Transmission length including 3 dB system reserve 500 V AC for one
163. eason why this device cannot be switched to the desired state Operational and administrative state are the same no errors 0 Invalid because client 1 Multiple MRP managers in the ring 2 MRP test frames only reach MRP ring port 4 flWorkFWCtrIMRPInfoDomainRingOpenCount OID Syntax Access Description 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 10 1 1 1 13 Integer Read Counter for MRP ring port modifications for manager only flWorkFWCtrIMRPInfoDomainLastRingOpenChange OID Syntax Access Description 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 10 1 1 1 14 Integer Read Indicates the time since the last change in the MRP ring port status fIWorkFWCtrlMRPInfoDomainRoundTripDelayMax OID Syntax Access Description 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 10 1 1 1 15 Integer Read Displays the maximum round trip delay time in milliseconds since the device was started fIWorkFWCtrlMRPInfoDomainRoundTripDelayMin OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 10 1 1 1 16 Syntax Integer Access Read Description Displays the minimum round trip delay time in milliseconds since the device was started flWorkFWCtrIMRPInfoDeviceBlockingSupport OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 10 2 2 Syntax Integer32 Access Read Description Indicates whether the port supports Blocking Blocking not supported Blocking supported 2 6874_en_16 PHOENIX CONTACT 4 113 FL SWITCH MM HS OID OID OID Syntax Access Description
164. eb page will be refreshed in 20 sec automatically change the interval at the web page Services Port Table Module Interface Port Type PortStatus Link State xi 1 TX 10 100 enable 100 MBit FD 2 TX 10 100 enable 100 MBit FD TX 10 100 3 MEM enable not connected HS 4 enable not connected 8 empty enable not connected 6 empty enable not connected x4 enable not connected 8 empty enable connected When setting the transmission mode make sure that the same settings have been made at both ends of the connection If the settings are not the same this can result in increased collisions or CRC errors and can adversely affect network performance Ports Port Cfg Table menu This menu provides an overview of the important configuration settings for all ports and also provides the option to set the status transmission mode and link monitoring function for all existing ports 4 26 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 16 Configuration and diagnostics Port Configuration Table Module Interface Port Status Modus MEOS 1 enable AutoNeg enable A 2 enable 100 HD disable 3 enable v 100 FD v enable 4 disable v AutoNeg enable 5 disable enable 5 6 enable AutoNeg enable v 7 enable v AutoNeg disable enable w AuoNeg disable
165. echnical data 5 12 5 12 1 3 Revision history of this 12 7 12 2 Typical current consumption MMS 12 8 iv PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 16 Table of contents 12 3 Ordering data dede Pere i 12 9 12 3 1 Ordering data MMS 12 9 12 3 2 Ordering data for GL certified components GL Certificate No 24 2750 4 12 9 12 8 3 Ordering data MCS 12 10 12 8 4 Accessories 5 5 12 10 6874 en 16 PHOENIX CONTACT V FL SWITCH HS FL SWITCH MCS vi PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 16 The Modular Managed Switch System MMS and the Managed Compact Switch MCS 1 The Modular Managed Switch System MMS and the Managed Compact Switch MCS B Transmission method Unless stated otherwise all information in this manual is valid for the FL SWITCH MM HS and FL SWITCH MM HS M modular devices as well as for the FL MXT and FL MXT M extension stations and the FL SWITCH MCS 16TX and FL SWITCH MCS 14TX 2FX compact devices 1 1 Properties MMS The Modular Managed Switch Modular Managed Switch System MMS is an Ethernet switch which is suitable for industrial use and consists of a head station extension modules and interface modules The head station and extension modules contain the entire Ethernet swit
166. encoded form see also Section Meaning of the 7 segment display MMS on page 1 14 Configuration comparison The configurations in the non volatile memory of Status the Head Station and the memory module are equal Compare Configuration comparison web page Enter password Figure 4 30 If you replace the memory module with another memory module within a few seconds there is no need to update the configuration comparison manually 4 24 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 16 Configuration and diagnostics Clear Memory Module Here you can delete the memory module by entering a valid password Clear Memory Module You can clear the Memory Module to get an empty module using the button below switch with an empty Memory Module loads the configuration out of the non volatile memory of the Head Station during the startup phase new configuration will be stored in the Memory Module when you save the current configuration or the device is booting Enter password Figure 4 31 Clear Memory Module web page 4 2 3 6 Switch Station Services menu Reboot Totrigger a reboot via the web interface enter a valid password Save the configuration beforehand so that configuration modifications are retained or can be activated via a restart Port Security Status you can globally activate deactivate the port security function The settings for the individua
167. eneral Configuration IP Configuration menu This page displays the set IP parameters management VLAN ID and addressing mechanism The management VLAN ID specifies in which VLAN the switch can be accessed if it is operating in Tagging VLAN mode To change the IP parameters via WBM Static assignment must be selected IP Configuration Current Addresses IP Address 472 16 2 200 Subnet Mask 255 255 0 0 Default Gateway 172 16 2 200 Please enter Address Subnet Mask and Gateway Address in dotted decimal notation e g 172 16 16 230 Management Wlan ID 0001 Default VLAN 1 Note The Management Vian ID is only important for access to the management agent web server snmp agent of this device in the vian mode Vian Tagging see web page Switch Station Static Assignment Bootstrap Protocol BootP Type ofthe IP address Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol assignment DHCP Profinet IO Device with Discovery and Configuration Protocol DCP The settings BootP and DCP become effective after saving the configuration and rebooting the device Enter password Apply Figure 4 15 IP Configuration web page eee Q IP address assignment While the switch waits for IP address to be assigned 01 or dP in the display the mode LED selected via the mode button also flashes Static Assignment The switch
168. ent and application redundancy 9 5 1 1 PDEV in the firmware The PDEV function can be used for the FL SWITCH SMCS device range in firmware Version 2 2 or later In addition the corresponding version of the GSDML file must be used the FDCML file does not support PDEV at present These files are used to describe the device function and can be imported into an engineering tool The PDEV function can be used for the FL SWITCH MCS MMS device range in firmware Version 4 70 or later In addition the corresponding version of the GSDML file must be used the FDCML file does not support PDEV at present These files are used to describe the device function and can be imported into an engineering tool The PDEV function is only available in firmware Version 4 70 or later 6874 en 16 PHOENIX CONTACT 9 9 FL SWITCH HS 9 6 conformance class B Conformance according to PROFINET According to the PROFINET specification devices that are operated as IO devices must meet numerous points of conformance class B The table below provides an overview of the requirements that apply to the individual conformance classes Table 9 2 Requirements according to PROFINET conformance classes Class A Class B Class C Device Unmanaged Switches Unmanaged Switches Unmanaged Switches Managed Switches Managed Switches Managed Switches Medium Wired medium or fiber optic Wired medium or fiber optic Wired medium or fiber optic Application
169. ent counters Depending on the configuration the result of the evaluation is indicated to the management station by the agents using traps The following groups are supported statistics history alarm hosts hostTopN matrix filter capture and event 4 54 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874_en_16 Configuration and diagnostics 4 3 41 statistics 1 3 6 1 2 1 16 1 This MIB group contains information about e g the number of unicast multicast or broadcast telegrams telegram rate and distribution or the number of faulty telegrams classed according to error type The statistics group contains information about the network load and quality 1 etherStatsTable 1 etherStatsEntry 1 etherStatsIndex 2 etherStatsDataSource 3 etherStatsDropEvents 4 etherStatsOctets 5 etherStatsPkts 6 etherStatsBroadcastPkts 7 etherStatsMulticastPkts 8 etherStatsCRCAlignErrors 9 etherStatsUndersizePkts etherStatsOversizePkts etherStatsFragments etherStatsJabbers etherStatsCollisions etherStatsPkts64Octets etherStatsPkts65to127Octets etherStatsPkts128to255Octets etherStatsPkts256to51 1Octets etherStatsPkts512to1023Octets etherStatsPkts1024to1518Octets 20 etherStatsOwner 21 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 etherStatsStatus 4 8 4 2 history 1 3 6 1 2 1 16 2 The history group
170. er or an engineering tool Yes Three requests remain unanswered Assignment of IP parameters via BootP Is there a valid local IP address Assignment of IP parameters via DHCP 687407009 Start with local configuration data as long as valid data If the DHCP server is available does not respond indefinite waiting time Startup completed Figure 3 5 Flowchart Assigning IP parameters If DHCP is selected as the assignment mechanism the DHCP server must offer a DHCP lease time of at least five minutes so thatthe switch accepts the assigned IP parameters 6874 en 16 PHOENIX CONTACT 3 9 Product designation 3 3 Starting up interface modules with the MMS For GL certified operation only the interface modules listed in the table below are permitted Table 3 2 Interface modules with GL approval Designation Order No FL IF 2TX D 2832483 FL IF 2FX SC D 2832425 FL IF 2FX SM SC D 2832205 FL IF 2TX VS RJ F 2832344 FL IF 2TX VS RJ D 2832357 3 3 1 FL IF 2TX VS RJ Hot plugging When inserting and removing interface modules you do not have to switch off the supply voltage The interface modules are detected automatically and logged to the network management 3 3 1 1 Default upon delivery When the interface modules are inserted the auto negotiation
171. erated newRoot OID 1 3 6 1 2 1 17 0 1 Set a new root topologyChange OID 1 3 6 1 2 1 17 0 2 RSTP topology modification RstpRingFailure OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 3 0 6 Link down at the port to the root 5 2 4 2 Interrupted data paths and port states The described data path interruption by the Spanning Tree Protocol is created by disconnecting individual ports that no longer forward any data packets A port can have the following states Learning Forwarding Blocking Discarding Disabled link down or disconnected by the user The current port states are shown in the web interface 6874 en 16 PHOENIX CONTACT 5 13 FL SWITCH HS The properties of the various port states are shown in the table below Table 5 1 Properties of the port states Receiving and evaluating Learning the MAC Forwarding data packets BPDUS learning the addresses of connected normal switching function topology devices and creating switching tables Disabled Blocking Discarding X Learning X X Forwarding X X X The sequence of the five port states defined in the Spanning Tree Protocol cannot be assigned freely The following diagram illustrates the possible sequence of the port states Disabled Blocking Learning t Forwarding t 68749043 Figure 5 12 Sequence of the possible port states in STP After devic
172. ered cable interrupts In addition a fiber optic path to a deactivated termination device is also considered a cable interrupt as the connected device cannot send a link test pulse because it is switched off FarEnd Fault Detection indicates that the connection in the direction of the partner is not OK the partner does not indicate a link and therefore at least one fiber within the fiber optic cable is faulty or has not been assembled correctly 3 3 10 3 Connecting the SCRJ connectors To prevent dirt from entering the connectors do not remove the dust protection caps until just before connecting the connectors The same applies for the protective caps on the connectors 3 28 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 16 Startup and functions N N N NS WSIS 68740020 Figure 3 19 Connecting the SCRJ connectors 3 3 10 4 Fiber optic connection between devices When connecting two fiber optic interface modules note the signal direction of the fiber optics The fiber connection is always from the transmitter to the receiver The SCRJ connectors which are connected using a support are keyed to ensure that the assignment of the transmit and receive direction is correct
173. es securely in place Positive latches These latches must be pressed in order to remove the interface module previous versions used mounting screws Ethernet ports These are the ports for the various interfaces and connection directions Marking groove for Zackband ZBF Mounting screws to lock the interface modules in place 6874 en 16 PHOENIX CONTACT 1 9 FL SWITCH MM HS Figure 1 6 MMS housing dimensions in millimeters Housing dimensions of the converter board with interface module Figure 1 7 OA 90 68740014 Housing width 67 mm Housing dimensions of the FL CB IF converter b
174. ess Read and write Description This object can be used to specify whether you wish to use standard RSTP or also fast ring detection as well Standard RSTP 1 Fast ring detection 2 flSwitchRSTPRingTable OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 15 4 2 flSwitchRSTPRingEntry OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 15 4 2 1 flSwitchRSTPRinglndex OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 15 4 2 1 1 Syntax Integer 1 1024 Access Read Description This object specifies the RSTP ring number flSwitchRSTPRingMAC OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 15 4 2 1 2 Syntax MAC address Access Read Description This object specifies the MAC address of the switch which forms the alternative port path in this ring flSwitchRSTPRingBlockPort OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 15 4 2 1 3 Syntax Integer32 Access Read Description This object specifies the number of the blocked port in this ring flSwitchRSTPRingRootPort OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 15 4 2 1 4 Syntax Integer32 Access Read Description This object specifies the number of the local port often the root port in this ring flSwitchRSTPRingDesPort OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 15 4 2 1 5 4 120 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 16 Configuration and diagnostics Syntax Integer32 Access Read Description This object specifies the number of a local port designated port in this ring flSwitchRSTPRingStatus OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 15 4 2 1 6 Syntax Integer Access Read Description This object specifies the status of the RSTP ring Ring closed 3 Ring n
175. ess Table in a tabulator separated list Enter password Figure 4 47 MAC Address Table web page The Clear button can be used to delete entries in the MAC address table Diagnostics LLDP menu For information about LLDP please refer to Section LLDP Link Layer Discovery Protocol on page 10 1 4 2 3 7 Rapid Spanning Tree MRP multicast filtering VLAN For information about Rapid Spanning Tree please refer to Section 5 Rapid Spanning Tree For information about the Media Redundancy Protocol MRP please refer to Section 6 Media Redundancy Protocol MRP For information about multicast filtering please refer to Section 7 Multicast filtering For information about the VLAN function please refer to Section 8 Virtual Local Area Network VLAN 6874 en 16 PHOENIX CONTACT 4 41 FL SWITCH MM HS 4 3 Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP 4 3 1 General function SNMP is a manufacturer independent standard for Ethernet management It defines commands for reading and writing information and defines formats for error and status messages SNMP is also a structured model which comprises agents and their relevant MIB Management Information Base and a manager The manager is a software tool which is executed on a network management station The agents are located inside switches bus terminals routers and other devices that support SNMP The task of the agents is to collect and provide data in the MIB
176. esses this port again after the aging time has elapsed and the MAC address has been deleted from the MAC address table another trap is sent However if the duration of illegal access is shorter than the aging time only one trap is sent following the first access attempt 4 32 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 16 Configuration and diagnostics Block packets Having received unauthorized packets the port is blocked for all packets A trap is sent which indicates the unauthorized access attempt The port remains blocked until the block is lifted by the administrator using the Unlock button on the Switch Station Ports Port Security page Block packets with automatic reenabling Having received unauthorized packets the port is blocked for all packets A trap is sent which indicates the unauthorized access attempt After the aging time has elapsed the port is reenabled automatically The Port Security function is only suitable for ports to which termination devices are connected It is not recommended to use this function for backbone or uplink ports especially if RSTP is activated Enter the enabled MAC addresses as well as a name under Allowed MAC Addresses Port Security Port Number amp Module HS Interface 4 Port 7 9 None Trap only S ity Mod ecurity Mode Block packets Block packets with automatic reenabling Last Learned Source Mac 00 00 00 0
177. et 209 131 209 13 IP configuration in the user interface As well as displaying the set MAC address this screen can be used to view or modify the IP parameters All settings are transferred using APPLY but are not saved permanently Use the SAVE function to save the active configuration settings permanently Reset to default settings 6874 en 16 PHOENIX CONTACT 4 131 FL SWITCH MM HS Select Reset in the Basic Switch Configuration screen The type of reset can now be selected Reset Switch Warning Warning Resetting the switch will cause all connectivity to the switch to be lost until the switch has rebooted If you select reset to factory default all configuration information will be reset to its factory default settings Confirm Reset No gt PREV MENU APPLY Push Space Bar to select and reset the switch 68740012 Figure 4 63 Reset to default settings This screen can be used to reset the switch to the default settings This undoes any changes to the configuration and resets all IP parameters to the settings default upon delivery see Section 3 1 1 on page 3 1 Resetting to the default settings also resets the password to private For security reasons we recommend you enter a new unique password 4 132 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 16 FL SWITCH HS Rapid Spanning Tree 5 FLSWITCH MM HS Rapid Spanning Tree Loops IEEE 8
178. ether the memory module used has an MRP master function Memory Module The switch got the configuration out of the Memory Module during the startup phase A Memory Module is present Source of the configuration Memory Module Information about the configuration stored in the Memory Module MMS configuration Configuration Name IP Address contained in the configuration 172 16 29 101 Version of the firmware which 0460 has saved the configuration Media Redundancy Protocol Master license attached to this memory module MRP master license is attached to this memory module Configuration comparison The configurations in the non volatile memory Status ofthe Head Station and the memory module are equal Compare Enter password Clear Memory Module You can clear the Memory Module to get an empty module using the button below A switch with an empty Memory Module loads the configuration out of the non volatile memory of the Head Station during the startup phase new configuration wil be stored in the Memory Module when you save the current configuration or the device is booting Enter password Figure 4 29 Memory Module web page Here you can compare the configuration on the memory module with the configuration in the head station memory The result is displayed in text format In addition the result is displayed in
179. figuration web page 6 4 2 1 Using MRP in VLAN mode When using VLANS a standard tag with the highest priority is assigned to the MRP packets In addition a VLAN ID can be specified in the MRP configuration Only static VLAN entries which are listed in WBM under Switch VLAN Static VLAN be used The tag is only added to the MRP packet if the port to which the MRP packet is sent is operating in tagging mode 6874 en 16 PHOENIX CONTACT 6 5 FL SWITCH HS 6 6 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 16 Multicast filtering 7 Multicast filtering Multicast 7 1 Basics Multicast applicatioFL SWITCH MM HSns unlike unicast applications with point to point communication do not transmit their data with the MAC address of the destination but with an independent multicast group address Always using wireless communication a station transmits one data packet that is received by one or more receiver stations Advantages 1 If for example a data packet of a transmitter is to be transmitted to eight receivers the same packet does not have to be sent eight times to the addresses of all eight devices Instead it only needs to be sent once to the address of the multicast group that includes the eight devices 2 When using multicast communication and filtering the required bandwidth for data transmission is reduced because each packet can only be transmitted once A maximum of 128 multicast groups can be created up to 20
180. for a port termination device is connected to the port A Additional infrastructure components are connected to the port The corresponding network segment does not contain any loops Additional infrastructure components are connected to the port forming a Spanning Tree of their own No additional redundant connections to this network segment are permitted 5 24 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 16 FL SWITCH HS Rapid Spanning Tree 5 2 5 9 Modifying the protocol timers NOTE Modifying the protocol timers may result in unstable networks It may be necessary to modify the protocol timers if e g there are more than ten active Spanning Tree components in a single network You can also attempt to reduce the reconfiguration times by modifying the timers However care should be taken in order to prevent unstable networks Please note that the protocol times are specified by the root switch and that they are distributed to all devices via BPDU Itis therefore only necessary to modify the values in the root switch If the root switch fails the timer values of another active STP switch i e the new root switch will be valid for the entire network segment Please remember this during component configuration Specifying the timer values STP and RSTP Maximum number of active Spanning Tree components along the path beginning at the root switch please refer to the following two example illustrations
181. g interface modules you do not have to switch off the supply voltage The interface modules are detected automatically and logged to the network management 6874 en 16 PHOENIX CONTACT 3 21 Product designation 3 3 7 1 Default upon delivery When the interface modules are inserted the auto negotiation and auto crossing functions are activated for the twisted pair port and the data transmission rate is set to 100 Mbps full duplex for the HCS port Port monitoring is not activated for the two ports If an interface module is inserted in a MMS that has already been parameterized the existing configuration remains active 3 3 7 2 Functions of the HCS interface Line monitoring According to standard IEEE 802 3 the switch monitors the connected fiber optic cables for interrupts Ports that are not being used are considered cable interrupts In addition an HCS path to a deactivated termination device is also considered a cable interrupt as the connected device cannot send a link test pulse because it is switched off 3 3 7 3 Functions of the twisted pair interface Auto negotiation Auto negotiation is a method whereby the switch automatically detects the operating parameters for the connected network and sets the corresponding parameters 10 Mbps 100 Mbps data transmission rate and half full duplex transmission mode for its RJ45 ports Automatic port setting eliminates the need for manu
182. ghMode 4 Atleast two priorities required 4 recommended VLAN tagging Priority tagging VLAN configu ration removal and modifica tion of tag headers is optional Priority tagging VLAN configu ration removal and modifica tion of tag headers is optional Priority tagging VLAN configu ration removal and modifica tion of tag headers is optional LLDP Only LLDP is mandatory LLDP MIB and LLDP EXT MIB are optional LLDP including LLDP MIB is mandatory LLDP including LLDP MIB and LLDP EXT MIB is mandatory SNMP Optional Optional Optional 9 10 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 16 LLDP Link Layer Discovery Protocol 10 LLDP Link Layer Discovery Protocol 10 1 Basics LLDP The switch supports LLDP according to IEEE 802 1ab and enables topology detection of devices that also have LLDP activated Advantages of using LLDP Improved error location detection mproved device replacement efficient network configuration The following information is received by or sent to neighbors as long as LLDP is activated The device sends its own management and connection information to neighboring devices The device receives management and connection information from neighboring devices Displaying LLDP The information that is collected is presented in a table in WBM The table includes the port information numbers that are used to connect both devices together as
183. gure 2 16 If redundant power supply monitoring is active default setting an error is indicated if only one voltage is applied A bridge between US1 and US2 dotted line connection prevents this error message Itis also possible to deactivate monitoring in web based management or via SNMP 5 US1 GND 052 GND X6 R1 R2 X7 V 24 PR pA 3s 9 8 0 0190 4 0 o M 24 V DC 68740005 Figure 2 15 Supplying the system using one voltage source Redundant 24 V DC supply X5 051 GND 052 GND X6 R1 R2 24 pA O OGQ Q O 8 O 2211 I V 24 V DC 24 V DC 68740006 Figure 2 16 Supplying the system using two voltage sources 2 10 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 16 Mounting and installation 24 V DC 2 7 2 Connecting the supply voltage to the FL SWITCH MM HS M for GL certified operation NOTE For GL certified operation an NEF 1 3 filter for Environmental Category EMC2 NEF 1 6 for EMC1 must be used and the components must be installed in a metal control cabinet The system is operated using a 24 V DC voltage which is applied at the head station If required the voltage can also be supplied redundantly see Figure 2 18 If redundant power supply monitoring is active default setting an error is indicated if only one voltage is applied A bridge between US1 and US2 dotted line connection prevents this error message Iti
184. gure the switch via the engineering tool PC WorX Activation deactivation of PROFINET alarms Configuration of port mode Configuration of port state Activation deactivation of MRP 9 2 4 PROFINET flashing function If the switch is requested to flash in PROFINET mode by the engineering tool 00 and the previous current indication alternately flash in the display 9 2 5 Device naming In order to start up a switch in PROFINET mode each switch must be assigned a name once i e each PROFINET device is assigned a unique device name A device search Read PROFINET function in PC WorX is performed via the engineering tool where all the devices that can be accessed in the network are listed After identifying unknown devices via the specified MAC address or the flashing function the device name configured in the engineering tool is saved permanently on the switch with the Assign Name function The device name can also be assigned via WBM before switching to PROFINET mode 9 2 6 Operating in the PROFINET environment A switch that has already been assigned a name starts PROFINET mode without an IP address and waits for the assignment of an IP configuration dP in the display and flashing of the LED for the currently active mode Once the project has been translated and downloaded to the control system the control system implements startup and configuration As soon as a communication rela
185. gy detection of a Rapid Spanning Tree network RSTP 5 13 5 2 5 Configuration notes for Rapid Spanning Tree 5 16 6 Media Redundancy 6 1 6 1 Gerieral f nctioh eid cete de eels eade ee 6 1 6 2 MIP manager ee eee HR RR ERE 6 1 6 2 1 Network nennen 6 2 6 3 Enabling web pages for using MRP in WBM seeemHHH 6 4 6 4 Configuration of MRBP 5 cue c be ee pnt 6 4 6 4 1 MRP Gerieral 6 4 64 2 Configuration 6 5 77 7 1 7 1 HC C 7 1 7 2 Enabling the web pages for multicast filtering WBM 7 1 7 8 Static multicast pa e dede rd ponen p as 7 1 7 3 1 Current Multicast Groups web page 7 2 7 3 2 Creating static multicast 7 2 7 3 3 Procedure for creating a multicast group 7 4 7 4 Dynamic multicast 7 7 7 4 1 Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP 7 7 7
186. h available priority levels be selected under Priority Level 3 4 4 3 Strict priority The switch supports two priority queues for adjusting the packet processing sequence traffic classes according to IEEE 802 1D Data telegrams that are received are assigned to these classes according to their priority which is specified in the VLAN prioritization tag Data packets with values between 0 and in the priority field low priority default Data packets with values between 4 7 in the priority field are transmitted via the switch with high priority The MMS MCS uses Strict Priority for transmitting data telegrams First all high priority data packets are assigned once these are forwarded low priority telegrams are assigned This function prevents delays in high priority data transmission due to large volumes of low priority data traffic Low priority traffic is rejected when the memory or data channel is overloaded 6874 en 16 PHOENIX CONTACT 3 33 Product designation 3 34 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 16 Configuration and diagnostics 4 Configuration and diagnostics The MMS MCS offers several user interfaces for accessing configuration and diagnostic data The preferred interfaces are the web interface and SNMP interface These two interfaces can be used to make all the necessary settings and request all information Access via Telnet V 24 RS 232 interface only enables acces
187. han seven switches along the relevant path then the large tree support option must first be enabled on all devices tis recommended that large tree support is not activated in networks with less than seven switches along the relevant path Maximum Age of STP Information The parameter is set by the root switch and used by all switches in the ring The parameter is sent to make sure that each switch in the network has a constant value against which the age of the saved configuration is tested The Maximum Age of STP Information Hello Time and Forward Delay fields have the same meaning as for STP These values are used when this switch becomes a root The values currently used can be found under R STP General Hello Time Specifies the time interval within which the root bridge regularly reports to the other bridges via BPDU Forward Delay The forward delay value indicates how long the switch is to wait in order for the port state in STP mode to change from Discarding to Listening and from Listening to Learning 2 x forward delay The Maximum Age of STP Hello Time and Forward Delay parameters are optimized by default upon delivery They should not be modified 6874 en 16 PHOENIX CONTACT 5 5 FL SWITCH MM HS R STP Port Table R STP Port Table Module Interface Port Oper Edge Port Protocol STP State 1 RSTP forwarding 2 edge port RSTP discarding edge por
188. he connector and the holding clamp are snapped into place 6874 en 16 PHOENIX CONTACT 2 5 FL SWITCH MM HS 3 Secure the interface module using the screw on the bottom right hand side of the interface module Figure 2 7 Securing the interface module Removal 1 Remove the mounting screw Figure 2 8 Removing the mounting screw on interface modules 2 Pressthe positive latch A and pull out the module B Figure 2 9 Removing the interface module 2 6 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 16 Mounting and installation 2 4 Arrangement of the interface modules If the FL SWITCH MM HS with two FL MXT extension modules is additionally operated with one FL IF 2TX D memory module and up to four FL IF POF SCRJ D interface modules at the same time the following arrangement must be observed MM HS MXT 1 MXT 2 DELSI oo o io tao mmm mmm 9 5 Kove E 28 28 2 2 2 2 Lg 2 2 EE MM Ed Ext Ed Ed Et Ed Ext E E Port Port Port Port Port Port Port 7 11 13 15 19 21 23 00A0451BDD usr Port Port Port Port Port Port Port 8 12 14 16 20 22 24 Figure 2 10 Arrangement of the interface modules 6874 en 16 PHOENIX CONTACT 2 7 FL SWI
189. he interface module is plugged in and there is a connected 48 V supply following management functions are available Display error states for each port and communicate via the alarm contact yes no Connect disconnect voltage for each port Switch current limitation on or off for loads classified as Class 1 devices Send Traps when the PoE status changes following diagnostic information is displayed No error Surge voltage undervoltage Thermal error Overload Disconnected load the current consumption atthis port is less than 10 mA the supply voltage is disconnected by the PoE module No 48 V supply No PoE interface module detected at this port No hardware support due to the system bus Detected class of a connected termination device Class 0 to Class 4 Output voltage and output current Hot plugging When inserting and removing interface modules you do not have to switch off the supply voltage The interface modules are detected automatically and logged to the network management 3 3 9 1 Default upon delivery When the interface modules are inserted the auto negotiation and auto crossing functions are activated Link monitoring for the twisted pair ports is not activated If an interface module is inserted in a MMS that has already been parameterized the existing configuration remains active 3 3 9 2 Functions Auto negotiation Auto negotiation is a method where
190. he received optical power is below the required minimum value The actual value of the system reserve can read by the Profinet engeneering and also be used for Profinet alarms 3 30 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 16 Startup and functions 3 4 Frame switching The MMS MCS operates in store and forward mode When receiving a data packet the switch analyzes the source and destination addresses The switch stores up to 8000 MAC addresses with an adjustable aging time of 10 to 825 seconds in its address table 3 4 1 Store and forward All data telegrams that are received by the switch are saved and their validity is checked Invalid or faulty data packets gt 1522 bytes or CRC errors and fragments 64 bytes are rejected Valid data telegrams are forwarded by the switch 3 4 2 Multi address function The switch learns all the source addresses for each port Only packets with Unknown source addresses A source address for this port Amulticast broadcast address are forwarded to the destination address field via the relevant port The switch can learn up to 8000 addresses This is important when more than one termination device is connected to one or more ports In this way several independent subnetworks can be connected to one switch 3 4 3 Learning addresses The switch independently learns the addresses for termination devices which are connected via a port by evaluating the source addresses in the d
191. heck the cables connectors least one faulty link nweb based management check at which port link monitoring see page 4 27 is indicating an error Restore the data connection to this port or deactivate link monitoring for this port Check the correct position of the interface module on the head station or on the extension module Cd The switch is operating as a Setthe desired configuration at the switch PROFINET IO device The configu ration of the switch and the configu ration transmitted by the PROFINET engineering tool are different Modify the control program so that it contains the existing switch configuration 1 16 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 16 The Modular Managed Switch System MMS and the Managed Compact Switch 5 Display Meaning Remedy bF System bus error Bus Fail Make sure that the extension modules are plugged in correctly Restart the switch Po Power Power over Ethernet monitoring has been activated on at least one port and an error has occurred Check the physical connection at the PoE ports and the settings in WBM HS Hardware support Atleast one interface module is inserted in the MMS that is not fully supported by the MMS hardware version used The interface module transmits data the management functions are deactivated The message appears for approximately ten seconds on the display after a restart or after interface modules
192. iguration You find the Reboot function on the web page Switch Station Services Enter password Start Figure 4 28 Configuration file transfer web page When a configuration is uploaded from the MMS MCS to a PC the last saved version is transmitted If you want to transmit the active configuration first save it again Save current configuration function When a configuration is downloaded from the PC to a MMS MCS the new configuration is only activated once the switch has been reset The use of a configuration file does not affect an existing old password Device replacement Configuration using a configuration file is used when replacing devices To duplicate devices using a configuration file observe the following Create a point to point connection between a MMS MCS and the management station Load the configuration file on the MMS MCS Reset the MMS MCS Adjust the IP parameters Savethe configuration Save current configuration function The duplicated switch can now be operated in the network using the adjusted IP parameters Config Management Memory Module menu 6874 en 16 PHOENIX CONTACT 4 23 FL SWITCH HS Memory Module Configuration comparison This web page provides an overview of the configuration the memory module and indicates which configuration was used during booting This WBM page indicates wh
193. igure 2 4 and the end clamp should only be mounted on the right hand side once the last extension module has been mounted Mounting Place the module onto the DIN rail from above A The upper holding keyway must be hooked onto the top edge of the DIN rail Push the module from the front towards the mounting surface B 1 Figure 2 1 Snapping the head station onto the DIN rail 2 Oncethe module has been snapped on properly check that it is fixed securely on the DIN rail Check whether the positive latches are facing upwards i e snapped on correctly PHOENIX CONTACT 2 1 6874 en 16 FL SWITCH MM HS Removal 1 Remove all plug in connections or interface modules 2 Pull down the positive latches using a suitable tool 9 screwdriver Both positive latches remain snapped out Then swivel the bottom of the module away from the DIN rail slightly A Next lift the module upwards away from the DIN rail B A KC Be Figure 2 2 Removing the head station 2 2 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 16 Mounting and installation 2 2 Mounting and removing extension modules MMS NOTE Always switch off the supply voltage when mounting removing the extension modules D Mounting 1 Place the module onto the DIN rail from above A The upper holding keyway must be hooked onto the top edge of the DIN rail Push the module from the f
194. ilure These redundant paths are impermissible loops The Spanning Tree Protocol automatically converts this topology into tree by disconnecting selected ports In this context one of the switches is assigned the role of the root of the tree From this root all other switches can be accessed via a single data path LLIN ity sibi 68740051 m at MI Figure 5 1 Possible tree structure with Spanning Tree 6874 en 16 PHOENIX CONTACT 5 1 FL SWITCH MM HS 5 2 R STP startup Startup consists of two parts that must be executed in the specified order 1 Enable R STP switches that are to be operated as active R STP components in the network 2 Connectthe switches to form a meshed topology Only create the meshed topology after activating R STP 5 2 1 Enabling R STP
195. inciple Address table SNMP Transmission capacity per port 64 byte packet size half duplex Supported MIBs Housing dimensions width x height x depth in mm Permissible operating temperature Permissible storage temperature Degree of protection Class of protection Laser protection only FL SWITCH MCS 14TX 2FX Humidity Operation Storage Air pressure Class A Class 3 Criterion B 10 V m Criterion A 10 Criterion A Data lines 1 kV Criterion A Power supply lines 2 2 kV Criterion B Data lines 1 kV asymmetrical Criterion B Power supply lines 0 5 kV symmetrical asymmetrical Criterion B Technical data MCS Managed Compact Ethernet Fast Ethernet Switch conforms to standard IEEE 802 3 Store and forward 8000 MAC addresses Version 1 and 2c 10 Mbps 14 880 pps packets per second At100 Mbps 148 800 pps MIB Il RMON MIB bridge MIB If MIB Etherlike MIB and Phoenix Contact private SNMP objects 214 x 95 x 71 depth from top edge of DIN rail 0 C to 55 C 20 C to 70 C 20 DIN 40050 IEC 60529 Class 3 VDE 0106 IEC 60536 Class 1 according to EN 60825 1 10 to 95 no condensation 10 to 95 no condensation Operation 80 kPa to 108 kPa 2000 m above sea level Storage 70 kPa to 108 kPa 3000 m above sea level 6874_en_16 PHOENIX CONTACT 12 5 Product designation General data Mounting position Connection to protective earth ground Weight Supply voltage
196. ing ports These two ports of this switch belong to the ring that is listed ring ID Blocking port This port deliberately breaks the loop The following states can occur for ring detection Not Ready Ring detection has not yet been completed Ring detection has been completed and quick switch over is possible in the event of an error Breaked The ring is broken on this branch in the direction of the root switch Failed on Port A The ring was broken on this switch at port A In the event of a link failure in the ring the trapRstpRingFailure trap is sent If Breaked or Failed status lasts for longer than 60 seconds it is no longer displayed after the next topology modification since these rings no longer exist When using RSTP fast ring detection please note the following For RSTP fast ring detection do not use devices that do not support this function Enable RSTP fast ring detection on all devices All data paths must be in full duplex mode 5 10 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 16 FL SWITCH HS Rapid Spanning Tree 5 2 1 4 Fast ring detection switch over times With the maximum permissible number of 57 switches in the ring the following diagram illustrates the switch over time Switch over time with 57 switches in the ring 500 400 300 200 Maximum switch over time in ms 100 6784100065 0 200 40
197. ion is only active when auto negotiation is enabled If the transmission speed or transmission mode is set to a fixed value the auto crossing function is disabled flWorkNetPortSTPEnable OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 2 2 1 10 Syntax Integer Access Read and write Description This object controls the handling of BPDUs if Rapid Spanning Tree is activated Firmware with Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP not activated 1 RSTP activated 2 Firmware with Spanning Tree Protocol STP not activated port is in Fast forwarding mode 1 STP activated 2 flWorkNetPortlflndex OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 2 2 1 11 Syntax Integer32 0 1024 Access Read Description Contains the index of the port according to IEEE 802 3ad 4 82 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874_en_16 Configuration and diagnostics flWorkNetLLWHPort OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 2 2 1 12 Syntax Integer32 8193 8296 Access Read Description Contains the index of the port according to IEEE 802 3ad but possibly with gaps due to missing ports flWorkNetPortType OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 2 2 1 13 Syntax Octet string Access Read Description Specifies the medium of this port flWorkNetPortModuleName OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 2 2 1 14 Syntax Octet string Access Read Description Specifies the name of the module flWorkNetPortinterfaceName OID Syntax Access Description 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 2 2 1 15 Octet string Read Specifies the name
198. iption The table contains the following objects sysORIndex sysORID sysORDescr and sysO RUpTime 4 3 3 2 Interface group 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 The interface group contains information about device interfaces 2 interfaces 1 ifNumber 2 ifTable 1 if Entry 1 iflndex 2 ifDescr 3 ifType 4 ifMtu 5 ifSpeed 6 ifPhysAddress 7 ifAdminStatus 8 ifOperStatus 9 ifLastChange iflnOctets iflnUcastPkts iflnNUcastPkts iflnDiscards iflnErrors iflnUnknownProtos ifOutOctets ifOutUcastPkts ifOutNUcastPkts ifOutDiscards ifOutErrors ifOutQLen ifSpecific 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 1 1 1 1 4 4 1 20 21 554 EH seq ex i ex us 22 Ic 21 OCU 4 3 3 3 Address translation group 1 3 6 1 2 1 3 The address translation group has mandatory characters for all systems It contains information about the address assignment 3 at 1 atTable 1 atEntry 1 atlflndex 2 atPhysAddress 3 atNetAddress 6874_en_16 PHOENIX CONTACT 4 49 FL SWITCH HS 4 3 3 4 Internet protocol group 1 3 6 1 2 1 4 The Internet protocol group has mandatory characters for all systems It contains information concerning IP switching 4 ip 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ipOutRequests i
199. irm by entering your password Activating Redundancy under General Configuration User Interfaces does not activate aredundancy mechanism In the WBM menu the Media Redundancy page under which the function can be configured and activated is enabled 6 4 Configuration of MRP 6 4 1 MRP General MRP can also be configured by the Profinet engeneering The MRP General web page shows the current parameters set for using the protocol The following information is displayed Operating mode Disabled MRP Client or MRP Manager Manager function Present or Missing Ringstatus if the switch is operating as an MRP manager OK ring closed or Fail ring open Topology modification counter Time of last topology modification Ring port numbers and status of the ports Forwarding or Blocking MRP General MRP Operating Mode MRP Manager MRM Manager License Present Ring Status Info Ring closed OK System Up Time 0 days 1 hours 14 minutes 25 seconds Last Status Change 0 days 0 hours 31 minutes 27 seconds Status Change Counter 17 Primary Ring Port Port 6 Status Forwarding Sec Ring Port Port 5 Status Blocking Note This web page will be refreshed in 29 sec automatically change the interval at the web page Device Configuration User Interfaces Figure 6 4 MRP General web page for an MRP manager 6 4 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874_en_16 Media Redundancy Protocol
200. irmware Firmware running rb A reset has been triggered via SNMP WBM or V 24 RS 232 the device is preparing to restart reboot rC After a device configuration update rC reconfiguration may appear in the display after a restart This means that the firmware automatically adapts the new configuration and then restarts the switch again Pb A port blocked by the port security function is indicated with Pb dP The device is operated as a PROFINET IO device and is waiting for startup using a PROFINET controller The device cannot be accessed via an IP address 00 alternates with another display In PROFINET mode the engineering tool called the flashing function SP Spanning Tree initialization active Messages during operation with the memory module Display Meaning Parameterization data being read from the plug in memory EC Equal configuration the configurations on the memory module and in the head station are the same dC Different configuration the configurations on the memory module and in the head station are different oC The memory module is empty Messages during operation with the MRP memory module Display Meaning LF Loop Failure the MRP manager has detected an error in the redundant ring 6874 en 16 PHOENIX CONTACT 1 15 FL SWITCH MM HS Messages in Smart mode Display Meaning 51 Exit Smart mode
201. is divided into subnetworks the subnet masks must be observed during calculation otherwise some devices may be omitted Simplified The last address of an area is reserved as the broadcast address 0 addresses Value 0 is the ID of the specific network If the IP address starts with a zero the receiver is in the same network Example 0 2 1 1 refers to device 2 1 1 in this network The zero previously signified the broadcast address If older devices are used unauthorized broadcast and complete overload of the entire network broadcast storm may occur when using the IP address 0 3 2 2 4 Subnet masks Routers and gateways divide large networks into several subnetworks The IP addresses for individual devices are assigned to specific subnetworks by the subnet mask The network part of an IP address is not modified by the subnet mask An extended IP address is generated from the user address and subnet mask Because the masked subnetwork is only recognized by the local computers this extended IP address appears as a standard IP address to all the other devices Structure of the subnet mask The subnet mask always contains the same number of bits as an IP address The subnet mask has the same number of bits in the same position set to one which is reflected in the IP address for the network class Example An IP address from Class A contains a 1 byte network address and a 3 byte computer address Therefore the firs
202. its Class D 224 0 0 0 239 255 255 255 alae Mentifier for multicast group Identifier for multicast group 0765 0 bits Class E 240 0 0 0 247 255 255 255 a a 1 0 Reserved tor tuture applications Reserved Reserved for future applications future applications 61492009 Figure 3 3 Structure of IP addresses 6874_en_16 PHOENIX CONTACT 3 5 Product designation 3 2 2 3 Special IP addresses for special applications Certain IP addresses are reserved for special functions The following addresses should not be used as standard IP addresses 127 x x x addresses The Class A network address 127 is reserved for a loopback function on all computers regardless of the network class This loopback function may only be used on networked computers for internal test purposes If a telegram is addressed to a computer with the value 127 in the first byte the receiver immediately sends the telegram back to the transmitter Correct installation and configuration of the TCP IP software for example can be checked in this way As Layers 1 and 2 of the ISO OSI reference model are not included in the test they should be tested separately using the ping function Value 255 in the byte Value 255 is defined as a broadcast address The telegram is sent to all the computers that are in the same part of the network Examples 004 255 255 255 198 2 7 255 or 255 255 255 255 all the computers in all the networks If the network
203. iver on each modification or attempted modification of the de vice password and contains information about the status of the last modification or at tempted modification trapFWHealth 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 3 0 2 Sent on each firmware related modification to the diagnostic display and contains addi tional information about the firmware status trapFWConf 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 3 0 3 Sent each time the configuration is saved and informs the management station that the configuration has been saved successfully This trap is sent in the event of configuration modifications port name port mode device name IP address trap receiver address port mirroring etc which are not yet saved per manently The trap also provides a warning that if not saved permanently the modifica tions will be lost on a reset The flWorkNetlfParamAssignment object must be set to static 1 otherwise objects cannot be written trapPowerSupply 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 3 0 4 Sent each time the redundant power supply fails trapSecurityPort 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 3 0 5 Sent each time a disabled MAC address accesses a port trapRstpRingFailure 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 3 0 6 Sent in the event of a link interrupt in the redundant RSTP ring 6874 en 16 PHOENIX CONTACT 4 77 FL SWITCH MM HS OID Description OID Description OID Description OID OID OID Syntax Access Description OID Syntax Access De
204. j 7 Eeee q on mr ee Umm i DOUOOOLOOCOOCOLOOOLOULMN B M E i 9 705600105 Figure 5 15 Redundant coupling of network segments 6874 en 16 PHOENIX CONTACT 5 19 FL SWITCH MM HS Example with fast ring detection nogaj i i Switch 3 Switch 1 Priority Default Root bridge Priority 0 Switch 12 Priority Default Switch 41 L1 Switch 4 Priority 40000 Priority 40000 m 4l a g mmn Switch 6 oci omm Here Switch 2 Priority Default E d Backup root bridge ory 5 E 4 Priority 4000 E E Switch 10 Pri
205. ke sure that all 6874 en 16 PHOENIX CONTACT 5 23 FL SWITCH MM HS the other network switches have a lower priority higher value Here the set path costs are not evaluated R STP Configuration Rapid Spanning Tree Status Disable Enable Large Tree Support Disable e Enable Fast Ring Detection C Disable Enable Bridge Priority 2768 0 up to 61440 in steps of 4096 This bridge uses the following parameter if this bridge is the root bridge Maximum Age of STP Information Bs up to 40s Hello Time 2 s 1s up to 105 Forward Delay 15 s 4s up to 30s Enter password Figure 5 18 Specifying the root switch priority Specifying the root port or designated port The root port and designated port are always the ports with the lowest path costs If the costs are the same the priority is the decisive criterion If the priorities are also the same the port number is the decisive criterion Specify an appropriate combination of costs and priority on the STP Port Configuration page in WBM for the port specified as the root port or designated port Make sure that all the other network switches either have higher costs or a lower priority higher value 5 2 5 8 Disabling the Spanning Tree Protocol using the fast forwarding function i One ofthe following requirements must be met so that the Spanning Tree Protocol can be disabled
206. ketGroup 5 ifHCPacketGroup 6 ifVHCPacketGroup 7 ifRcvAddressGroup 9 ifStackGroup 10 ifGenerallnformationGroup 11 ifStackGroup2 12 ifOldObjectsGroup 13 ifCounterDiscontinuityGroup 2 ifCompliances 1 ifCompliance 2 ifCompliance2 8 ifTestGroup 0 1 2 1 1 1 4 3 10 3 etherMIBObjects 1 3 6 1 2 1 32 1 1 etherConformance 1 etherGroups 1 etherStatsGroup 2 etherCollisionTableGroup 3 etherStats100BbsGroup 4 etherStatsBaseGroup 5 etherStatsLowSpeedGroup 6 etherStatsHighSpeedGroup 7 etherDuplexGroup 8 etherControlGroup 9 etherControlPauseGroup 1 etherCompliances 1 etherCompliances 2 ether100MbsCompliance 3 dot3Compliance 4 68 6874 16 Configuration and diagnostics 4 3 10 4 1 0 8802 1 1 2 1 1 IlpConfiguration 1 IlgpMessageTxlnterval 2 IlpMessageTxHoldMultiplier 2 IldpStatistics 3 IldpLocalSystemData 1 IldpLocChassisldSubType 2 IldpLocChassisld 3 IldpLocSysName 4 IIdpLocSysDesc 5 IldpLocSysCapSupported 6 IldpLocSysCapEnabled 7 lldpLocPortTable 1 ldpLocPortMum 2 IldpLocPortldSubtype 3 IldpLocPortld 4 IIdpLocPortDesc 8 IldpLocManAdadrTable 1 IldpLocManAddrSubtype 2 IldpLocManAddr 3 IldpLocManAddrLen 4 IldpLo
207. l as shown in Figure 2 15 or Figure 2 17 for GL on the MMS or by deactivating redundant power supply monitoring in web based management 2 12 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 16 Mounting and installation 2 7 4 V 24 RS 232 interface for external management The 6 pos Mini DIN female connector provides a serial interface to connect a local management station It can be used to connect a VT100 terminal or a PC with corresponding terminal emulation to the management interface for an appropriate cable please refer to page 12 9 Set the following transmission parameters Bits per second 38400 Data bits 8 Parity None Stop bits 1 Flow control None V 24 RS 232 CTS L RTS e 1 gt 4 3G 22 1G 2 pp TxD res Figure 2 20 Assignment of the V 24 RS 232 interface 2 8 Grounding Grounding protects people and machines against hazardous voltages To avoid these dangers correct installation taking the local conditions into account is vital Factory Line devices must be grounded so that any possible interference is shielded from the data telegram and discharged to ground potential A wire of atleast 2 5 mm must be used for grounding When mounting on a DIN rail the DIN rail must be connected with protective earth ground using grounding terminal blocks The module is connected to protective earth ground via the metal base element
208. l ports can be made on the Port Port Security web page Illegal Address Counter Here you can reset the counter that records the unauthorized access attempts to the device Services Reboot The device accomplishes a reboot Note The device reboots with the last stored configuration save here before Enter password Port Security Status 9 Disable Enable You have to configure the port security for each port at the web page Ports Port Security Enter password Apply Illegal Address Counter Here you can set the Address Counter of all ports to zero You find the counters at the web page Ports Port Security Enter password You find the settings for the user interfaces at the web page Device Configuration User Interfaces Figure 4 32 Services web page 6874 en 16 PHOENIX CONTACT 4 25 FL SWITCH MM HS DHCP Relay Agent menu In this menu the DHCP relay agent can be activated deactivated according to the port the corresponding address of the DHCP server can be entered and the type of remote ID can be configured For additional information about the function of the DHCP relay agent please refer to Section DHCP relay agent on page 11 1 Ports Port Table menu Overview of all available ports Clicking on the relevant port number opens a port specific page Port Configuration Figure 4 33 Port Table web page Note This w
209. lComponents OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 1 2 flComponentsTable OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 1 2 1 flComponentsTableEntry OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 1 2 1 1 Syntax Access Description Generates a table with descriptions for components in the Factory Line product group which can be managed by this management unit flComponentsindex OID Syntax Access Description 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 1 2 1 1 1 Integer32 1 1024 Read Contains the product index for the component flComponentsName OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 1 2 1 1 2 6874 16 4 73 FL SWITCH HS Syntax Access Description Display string Read Contains the designation of the component flComponentsDescr OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 1 2 1 1 3 Syntax Display string Access Read Description Contains a brief description of the component flComponentsURL OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 1 2 1 1 4 Syntax Display string Access Read Description Contains the URL of a website with additional information www factoryline de flComponentsOrderNumber OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 1 2 1 1 5 Syntax Display string Access Read Description Contains the Order No of the component flWorkDevice OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 flWorkBasic OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 1 flWorkBasicName OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 1 1 Syntax Display string Access Read and write Description Contains the device name corresponds to sysName from M
210. lSecurityPortMacTableCapacityMax 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 8 2 4 Integer32 Read Displays the maximum number of authorized MAC addresses per port OID Syntax Access Description flWorkFWCtrlSecurityPortEnable 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 8 2 5 Integer Read and write Indicates whether the safety mechanism for this port is active If no valid MAC address has been defined the mechanism is deactivated Mechanism deactivated 1 Mechanism activated 2 OID Syntax Access Description flWorkFWCtrlSecurityPortlllegalAddrCounterClear 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 8 2 6 Integer Read and write Deletes all counters for unauthorized addresses During read access 1 not deleted is always transmitted Not deleted Delete 2 flWorkFWCtrlProfinet flWorkFWCtrlProfinetAlarm flWorkFWCtrlProfinetAlarmPortTable flWorkFWCtrlProfinetAlarmPortEntry OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 9 1 1 1 OID Syntax flWorkFWCtrlProfinetAlarmPortIndex 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 9 1 1 1 1 Integer32 1 1024 4 108 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 16 Configuration and diagnostics Access Description Read Displays the port number flWorkFWCtrlProfinetAlarmPortLinkMonitoring OID Syntax Access Description 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 9 1 1 1 2 Integer Read and write In PROFINET mode a slot can send an alarm if the link status changes from Connected to Not connected Do not se
211. lWorkBasicCompCapacity OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 1 12 Syntax Integer 32 Access Read Description Contains the number of interfaces actually connected flWorkComponents OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 2 flWorkComponentsTable OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 2 1 flWorkComponentsEntry OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 2 1 1 Description Generates a table with the available interface modules of this switch station flWorkComponentsIndex OID Syntax Access Description 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 2 1 1 1 Integer32 1 1024 Read Indicates the selected interface number flWorkComponentsOID OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 2 1 1 2 Syntax OBJECT IDENTIFIER Access Read Description This OID indicates the corresponding entry in fl WorkComponentsEntry flWorkComponentsURL OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 2 1 1 3 Syntax Display string Access Read Description Contains the IP address of the switch flWorkComponentsDevSign OID Syntax Access Description 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 2 1 1 4 Integer 0 24 Read Contains the designation of the interface module 4 76 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 16 Configuration and diagnostics OID OID OID Description OID Description OID Description OID Description OID Description OID Description flWorkTraps 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 3 flWorkTrapsDelemeter 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 3 0 trapPasswdAccess 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 3 0 1 Sent to the defined trap rece
212. larm triggered 2 flWorkNetPortPofScrjlfRxPowerLowAlarm OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 2 4 1 10 Syntax Integer Access Read Description This object indicates whether the RX power low alarm has been triggered Alarm not triggered 1 Alarm triggered 2 flWorkNetPortPofScrjlfRxPowerHighWarning OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 2 4 1 11 Syntax Integer Access Read Description This object indicates whether the RX power high warning message has been triggered Warning message not triggered 1 Warning message triggered 2 flWorkNetPortPofScrjlfRxPowerLowWarning OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 2 4 1 12 Syntax Integer Access Read Description This object indicates whether the RX power low warning message has been triggered Warning message not triggered 1 Warning message triggered 2 flWorkNetPortPofScrjlf Manufacturer OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 2 4 1 13 Syntax Octet string Access Read Description This object provides the name of the manufacturer of the POF SCRJ transceiver at this port flWorkNetPortPofScrjlfManufactOui OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 2 4 1 14 Syntax Octet string 6874 en 16 PHOENIX CONTACT 4 87 FL SWITCH MM HS Access Read Description This object provides the IEEE manufacturer ID of the manufacturer of the POF SCRJ trans ceiver at this port flWorkNetPortPofScrjlf Revision OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 2 4 1 16 Syntax Octet string Access Read Description This object provides the version
213. lccess Control for Web FL SWITCH M 00 80 25 03 5 41 00 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 lt BootP gt lt Redundancy WEB menus OFF RSTP OFF gt VLAN Transparent lt LAN Transparent gt lt Disable gt lt Disable gt Switch Operating Mode lt Default gt Web Interface lt Enable gt Telnet Interface lt Enable gt SNMP Interface lt Enable gt Reset lt No reset LOGOUT APPLY SAVE Enter Agent IP Address in decimal dot format e g 209 131 2809 13 Figure 4 53 IP configuration in the user interface As well as displaying the set MAC address this screen can be used to view or modify the IP parameters In order to set the IP parameters the Static option must be selected for IP Parameter Assignment This user interface screen can be used to determine the addressing mechanism or to trigger a device restart All settings are transferred using APPLY but are not saved permanently Use the SAVE function to save the active configuration settings permanently 6874_en_16 PHOENIX CONTACT 4 125 FL SWITCH MM HS Reset to default settings Reset Switch Warning Warning Resetting the switch will cause all connectivity to the switch to be lost until the switch has rebooted If you select reset to factory default all configuration information will be reset to its factory default settings Confirm Reset No gt PREV MENU APPLY Pu
214. le Enter password Apply Figure 4 39 Port Mirroring web page If the source port is one of the ports in the range port 1 to port 8 then another port in this group should be used as the destination port in order to avoid CRC errors and packets being lost The same applies for ports 9 to 16 and ports 17 to 24 Multicast data packets of created multicast groups cannot be mirrored Enter the destination port in the relevant multicast group in order to enable multicast packets to be received at the set destination port The port capacity is calculated according to the set transmission parameters Example A Source port is operated at 100 Mbps and reaches a capacity of 5 The destination port is operated at 10 Mbps Therefore with the same volume of data the destination port reaches a capacity of 5096 If ports are set with the same value port mirroring will be disabled The source port is set to 0 Ports Port Security menu In order to make individual settings for each port the Port Security function on the Switch Station Services page must first be activated The following options can be selected under Security Mode None No security settings for this port Trap only When disabled MAC address accesses a port a trap is sent to the pre defined trap targets The port is not blocked Atrap is sent for each MAC address that accesses a port illegally If this MAC address acc
215. lly isolated 4 4 1 1 Interface configuration Make the following settings on your Windows PC COM1 Properties Port Settings Bits per second 2400 Data bits Parity None Stop bits H Flow control oe O Restore Defaults Figure 4 51 Configuring the HyperTerminal 4 4 1 2 Calling the user interface Connect the PC and the switch using a suitable cable PRG CAB MINI DIN Order No 273061 1 Once you have established the connection select the Ctrl L key combination on the PC The switch then requests the screen contents 6874 en 16 PHOENIX CONTACT 4 123 FL SWITCH MM HS 4 4 2 User interface functions 4 4 2 1 Functions during the boot process after a restart If you open the user interface in the first five seconds immediately after a MMS MCS restart you have the option of triggering a firmware update Since the actual switch firmware is not yet started at this stage even in the event of an error e g if the firmware on the device is faulty this firmware can still be updated see Section Starting with faulty software firmware on page 4 127 4 4 2 2 Functions during operation The following functions are available in the user interface Setting IP parameters Selecting the addressing mechanism Resetto default settings Activating deactivating the web server the Telnet function and SNMP
216. martrixControlTable 1 matrixControlEntry 1 matrixControllndex 2 matrixControlDataSource 3 matrixControlTableSize 4 matrixControlLastDeleteTime 5 matrixControlOwner 6 matrixControlStatus 2 matrixSDTable 6874 en 16 PHOENIX CONTACT 4 57 FL SWITCH HS 1 matrixSDEntry 1 matrixSDSourceAddress 2 3 matrixSDIndex 4 matrixSDPkts 5 6 matrixSDErrors 3 matrixDSTable 1 matrixDSEntry 1 matrixDSSourceAddress 2 matrixDSDestAddress 3 matrixDSIndex 4 matrixDSPkts 5 matrixDSOctets 6 matrixDSErrors 4 3 4 7 filter 1 3 6 1 2 1 16 7 1 filterTable 1 filterEntry 1 filterIndex 2 filterChannellndex 3 filterPktDataOffset 4 filterPktData 5 filterPktDataMask 6 filterPktDataNotMask 7 filterPktStatus 8 filterPktStatusMask 9 filterPktStatusNotMask 10 filterOwner 11 filterStatus 2 channelTable 1 channelEntry 1 channellndex 2 channellflndex 3 channelAcceptTime 4 channelDataControl 5 channelTurnOnEventlndex 6 channelTurnOffEventIndex 7 channelEventIndex 9 channelMatches channelDescription channelOwner 8 channelEventStatus 0 1 2 channelStatus 1 1 1 4 58 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 16 Configuration and diagnostics 4 3 4 8 captur
217. minute 900 mA 40W 2 SC duplex female connector on the switch 1300 nm Class 1 according to DIN EN 60825 1 2001 11 6 4 km glass fiber with F G 50 125 0 7 dB km F1200 2 8 km glass fiber with F G 50 125 1 6 dB km F800 10 km glass fiber with F G 62 5 125 0 7 dB km F1000 3 0 km glass fiber with F G 62 5 125 2 6 dB km F1000 23 5 dBm 50 125 um 20 dBm 62 5 125 um 14 dBm 50 125 um 14 dBm 62 5 125 um 20 5 dBm 50 125 um 17 dBm 62 5 125 11 dBm 50 125 um 11 dBm 62 5 125 um 31 dBm dynamic 28 dBm static 14 dBm dynamic 11 dBm static 100 Mbps 2 SC duplex female connector on the switch 1300 nm Class 1 according to DIN EN 60825 1 2001 11 36 km glass fiber with F G 9 125 0 36 dB km 32 km glass fiber with F G 9 125 0 4 dB km 26 km glass fiber with F G 9 125 0 5 dB km 15 0 dBm 9 125 um 8 0 dBm 9 125 gt 31 dBm 9 125 um gt 7 dBm 9 125 100 Mbps 1 FLIF TX POF 100 2 FL IF 2POF 100 F SMA female connectors on the interface module 10 100 Mbps 650 nm 1m 50 m polymer fiber with F K 980 1000 230 dB km 6874 en 16 PHOENIX CONTACT 12 3 Product designation Ethernet interfaces POF SMA Average dynamic transmission power fiber type in link mode Minimum Average dynamic receiver sensitivity fiber type in link mode Minimum Optical overrange Ethernet interfaces HCS Number Connection format Data transmission rate Wavelength
218. n gt 4 Hardware Version gt 2 support includes system bus Version 4 2 includes system bus Version 3 1 PoE module sup Hardware Version gt 6 Hardware Version gt 4 port includes system bus Version 5 0 includes system bus Version 4 0 POF SCRJ mod Hardware Version gt 6 Hardware Version gt 4 ule support includes system bus Version 5 0 includes system bus Version 4 0 MRP module Hardware Version gt 6 Hardware Version gt 4 support includes system bus Version 5 0 includes system bus Version 4 0 1 2 4 Device view MMS 1 2 4 1 Front view of the head station Diagnostic status Function switch indicators for LEDs Connection for isplay gt T E xm extension module TEE cu outgoing system Reset Ord No 28 sadi interface button UB me 000 nau 000 000 Labeling field Gm aoe PEE 200 090 090 000 308 090 888 9 8 o o p o MAC address Supply voltage Alarm Mini DIN Slots for interface connection contact V 24 RS 232 modules Figure 1 3 Front view of the head station Diagnostic status indicators Important information is displayed directly on the device Each port has two LEDs The left hand LED always indicates the LINK while the right hand L
219. n IGMP query packet it will save the port via which it received the packet for the IGMP query time and add it to each dynamic multicast group 6874 en 16 PHOENIX CONTACT 7 9 FL SWITCH HS If the switch receives a multicast packet is still able to create new dynamic multicast groups upper limit not reached and it has saved one or more ports via which it received queries the switch will 1 create a new multicast group for this multicast address provided one does not already exist and 2 add the port via which it received the multicast packet and all query ports to this new group The multicast groups created as described above are deleted in accordance with the timeout rules For example if no more membership reports are received if the associated port is deleted from the groups or if no port other than the ports receiving queries is a member of the group this group is deleted b The switch is the active querier in the network segment If the switch receives a multicast packet and is still able to create new dynamic multicast groups upper limit not reached and it has saved one or more ports via which it received queries the switch will 1 create a new multicast group for this multicast address provided one does not already exist and 2 add the port via which it received the multicast packet and all query ports to this new group The multicast groups created as described above are deleted in accordance with
220. n client mode i e switches or other network components only ever receive a time from a time server but do not transmit their own times Each client synchronizes its system time with that of an SNTP server Time synchronization is carried out at fixed synchronization intervals Thelocal system time of the client is thus constantly corrected Synchronization is carried out in Universal Time Coordinated UTC format 4 16 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 16 Configuration and diagnostics The parameters for automatic time synchronization using SNTP can be set here Simple Network Time Protocol Configuration SNTP Status Disable Enable Unicast Mode Operating Mode Broadcast Mode Manycast Mode Pollintervall 04 16s Select how often the local system clock will be resynchronized by polling the SNTP Server B UTC Offset 01h Berlin Paris Select the offset of the local time zone to the UTC time Current Addresses Primary Server IP Address 198 1 62 1 1 J T Backup Server IP Address 0000 Broadcast IP Address 198 162 1 255 Please enter Server ip Address Backup Server Address and Broadcast Address in dotted decimal notation e g 1 72 16 16 230 Note The Server IP Address is needed for Unicast Mode The Backup Serwer Address is optional Broadcast Mode no IP Address is needed The Broadcast IP Address is needed only for Manyca
221. n including IP parameters is written to a plugged in memory module or MEM plug 6874 en 16 PHOENIX CONTACT 3 1 Product designation 3 2 Using Smart mode Smart mode enables the user to change the operating mode of the switch without having to access the management interface The switch offers the following setting options via Smart mode Reset to default settings Set PROFINET mode SetEthernet IP mode Exit Smart mode without changes 3 2 1 Activating Smart mode The mode button is used to call exit Smart mode and to selectthe desired setting The three mode LEDs indicate the mode that is currently set and the mode that is entered when exiting Smart mode 3 2 1 1 Calling Smart mode e the switch has booted as soon as the three mode LEDs go out press and hold down the mode button for at least five seconds When Smart mode is active the three LEDs flash e When Smart mode is started the switch is initially in the Exit without changes state 3 2 1 2 Selecting the desired setting e To select the various settings press the mode button briefly and select the desired operating mode 3 2 1 3 Exiting Smart mode e To exit press and hold down the mode button for at least five seconds The previously selected operating mode is saved 3 2 1 4 Possible operating modes in Smart mode The switch supports the selection of the following operating modes in Smart mode see also example below
222. n switches along the relevant path 5 18 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 16 FL SWITCH HS Rapid Spanning Tree 5 2 5 2 Example topologies 5 2 5 3 Redundant coupling of network segments In this example two network segments are connected via redundant data paths Two RSTP components have ports in the Blocking Discarding state highlighted in gray This is sufficient to operate the network i i ej a E LEG E i E SRSA el 3 i i i i ej Fe E a f E B essa eb 4 uem S2 peery m TE EM My e
223. n the set Polishing set for polymer fiber connectors required to assemble polymer fiber connectors Fiber optic polymer fiber cable for indoor installation HCS fiber connectors two duplex connectors in the set Tool kit for HCS connectors required to assemble HCS fiber connectors Fiber optic HCS cable for indoor installation Fiber optic HCS cable for outdoor installation HCS GI cable for inner laying duplex 200 230 um by the meter without connector with an increased bandwidth ideal for Ethernet applications rugged PUR outer sheath 8 mm outside diameter color green HCS GI cable for inner laying duplex 200 230 um with an increased bandwidth ideal for Ethernet applications rugged PUR outer sheath 8 mm outside diameter color green Order designation FL PBX 8TX FL PBX 6TX 4FX FL PF SEC 2TX FL PF SEC 8TX FL PF 2TX CAT5E FL PF 8TX CAT5E FL PF 2TX CAT 6 FL PF 8TX CAT 6 FL CAT5 PATCH 0 3 FL CAT5 PATCH 0 5 FL CAT5 PATCH 1 0 FL CAT5 PATCH 1 5 FL CAT5 PATCH 2 0 FL CAT5 PATCH 3 0 FL CAT5 PATCH 5 0 FL CAT5 PATCH 7 5 FL CAT5 PATCH 10 PSM SET SCRJ DUP 2 POF VS SCRJ POF POLISH PSM LWL KDHEAVY PSM SET SCRJ DUP 2 HCS PSM HCS KONFTOOL SCRJ PSM LWL HCS RUGGED 200 230 PSM LWL HCSO 200 230 FL FOC PN C HCS GI 200 230 FL FOC PN C HCS GI Order No 2832496 2832506 2832687 2832690 2891165 2891178 2891068 2891071 2832250 2832263 2832276 2832221 2832289 2832292 2832580 2832616 2832629 2708656
224. nable Block unkn MCs at querier Disable Enable Query Port Configuration Auto Query Port FRD MRP Disable Enable Static Query Ports Ports 1 8 LE Enter password Apply Clear auto detected Query Ports Enter password Clear Figure 7 4 General Multicast Configuration web page IGMP snooping In IGMP snooping the switch passively listens in on the IGMP messages that are sent over the network and dynamically creates the appropriate groups The groups are not saved and will be lost during every power down or when the snooping function is switched off IGMP snoop aging IGMP snoop aging is the time period during which membership reports are expected If this time passes without new membership reports being received the associated port is deleted from the groups 7 8 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 16 Multicast filtering IGMP query IGMP query interval A switch with activated query function actively sends queries of the version selected under IGMP Query at the IGMP Query Interval and evaluates the received reports The switch only sends IGMP query reports if IGMP snooping is enabled and only in the management VLAN Extended multicast source detection see 7 5 Multicast source detection on page 7 9 Forward unknown multicasts to querier Selection as to whether a group which forwards packets to the querier is created for unknown multicast pa
225. nd alarm Send alarm N flWorkFWCtrlProfinetAlarmPortPofScrjDiag OID Syntax Access Description 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 9 1 1 1 3 Integer Read and write In PROFINET mode a slot can send an alarm if the transmission power of a POF SCRJ port reaches a critical value or the port enters a critical state Do not send alarm 1 Send alarm flWorkFWCtrlProfinetAlarmPowerSupply OID Syntax Access Description 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 9 1 1 1 10 Integer Read and write In PROFINET mode the switch can send an alarm if one of the redundant power supplies fails Do not send alarm Send alarm N flWorkFWCtrlProfinetAlarmModuleRemove OID Syntax Access Description 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 9 1 1 1 11 Integer Read and write In PROFINET mode the switch can send an alarm if one of the interface modules is re moved Do not send alarm Send alarm N fIWorkFWCtrlMRP flWorkFWCtrIMRPConfig flWorkFWCtrlMRPConfigDomainTable flWorkFWCtrIMRPConfigDomainEntry OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 10 1 1 1 flWorkFWCtrIMRPConfigDomainldx 6874_en_16 PHOENIX CONTACT 4 109 FL SWITCH HS OID Syntax Access Description 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 10 1 1 1 1 Integer32 1 1024 Read Displays the index of the entry flWorkFWCtrIMRPConfigDomainUdid OID Syntax Access Description 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 10 1 1 1 2 Octet string Re
226. nd improved configuration handling of the memory module Extended multicast filtering multicast transmitters are detected and added to multicast groups Extended IGMP snooping and IGMP query function switch passively reads IGMP membership reports creates corresponding multicast groups and sends IGMP queries to multicast groups Visualization of port capacity Port prioritization Firmware 3 04 offers the following additional functions VLAN support Rapid Spanning Tree support Security options port based security and access control for WBM Optimization of the password concept Event table logging of important events Representation of MAC address table in WBM Firmware 4 03 offers the following additional functions Optimized Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP improved switch over times Fastring detection Large tree support Support of LLDP topology detection DHCP support DHCP with option 82 relay agent PROFINET device function and DCP Support of Power over Ethernet IEEE 802 3af Simplified port configuration IGMP query Version 1 and 2 Firmware 4 50 offers the following additional functions Support of the POF SCRu interface module and corresponding diagnostics SNMP traps be disabled individually The VLAN for management can be set VLAN ID to manage web SNMP ping IGMP query the switch in VLAN Tagging mode DHCP relay agent can
227. nd is indicated as unavailable You must now restart or reset the MMS MCS Following a restart the MMS MCS resends the BootP requests and receives the corresponding BootP reply from the Factory Manager Once the boot process has been completed the MMS MCS is indicated as available If the MMS MCS is still indicated as unavailable check your network card settings Please note that both devices must be located in the same network subnetwork If the Factory Manager receives the BootP requests this does not mean that the devices are located in the same subnetwork as the BootP requests are sent as a broadcast beyond subnetwork boundaries 4 1 3 Configuration and diagnostics Numerous options for configuring and diagnosing the MMS MCS can be found in the Device menu under Properties General Properties MMS x Firmware ptions Extended ptions Configuration General System Diagnostics Ports Trap T argets w Description Name FL SWITCH MM HS x TCP IP MAC Address IP Address 192 168 2 100 oo ao fas cz fea e Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 DefautGateway 0 0 0 0 Figure 4 3 General menu Here you can check or modify device names and types as well as IP parameters If you modify the IP address and or the other IP parameters using the Factory Manager once you click OK you will no longer have access via the Factory Manager Restarting the MMS MCS activ
228. network class is represented by the first bits The key factor is the number of ones before the first zero The assignment of classes is shown in the following table The empty cells in the table are not relevant to the network class and are already used for the network address Bit1 Bit2 Bit3 Bit4 Bit5 Class A 0 Class B 1 0 Class C 1 1 0 Class D 1 1 1 0 Class E 1 1 1 1 0 The bits for the network class are followed by those for the network address and the user address Depending on the network class a different number of bits are available both for the network address network ID and the user address host ID Network ID Host ID Class A 7 bits 24 bits Class B 14 bits 16 bits Class C 21 bits 8 bits Class D 28 bit multicast identifier Class E 27 bits reserved IP addresses can be represented in decimal or hexadecimal form In decimal notation bytes are separated by dots dotted decimal notation to show the logical grouping of the individual bytes The decimal points do not divide the address into a network and user address Only the value of the first bits before the first zero specifies the network class and thus the number of remaining bits in the address Possible address combinations 7 bits 24 bits its Class A 14 bits Abit 7 l6bis bits Class B 21 bits e 21bits 2 8 bits Class C 28bi t b
229. nfiguration using the assigned IP address The assigned IP address is not saved permanently which means that the switch waits to be assigned an address every time the device starts DCP is activated automatically if Profinet mode is selected If the MMS has established a PROFINET connection a dot appears in the bottom right corner of the display System Identification menu This menu is used to display or modify user specific device data e g location device name or function This device data is also available in SNMP System Identification Name of device fl switch mm hs1 0 Description Modular Managed Switch MMS Physical location Fab 3 011 Contact Admin 02002 Enter password Figure 4 16 System Identification menu 4 14 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 16 Configuration and diagnostics SNMP Trap Configuration menu SNMP Agent send traps function can be globally enabled disabled here SNMP Trap Configuration SNMP Agent Sending traps E Disable 6 Enable Trap Destination First trap manager IP address 1721525 Second trap manager 00 00 address Please enter addresses in dotted decimal notation e g 172 16 16 230 Trap Configuration SNMP Authentification Failure C Disable Enable Password modification Disable Enable Firmware status changed Disable Enable Configuration not saved Disable Enable Po
230. ng the documentation please contact your Phoenix Contact subsidiary Subsidiary contact information is available at www phoenixcontact com PHOENIX CONTACT GmbH amp Co KG FlachsmarktstraBe 8 32825 Blomberg GERMANY Should you have any suggestions or recommendations for improvement of the contents and layout of our manuals please send your comments to tecdoc phoenixcontact com PHOENIX CONTACT Please observe the following notes General terms and conditions of use for technical documentation Phoenix Contact reserves the right to alter correct and or improve the technical documentation and the products de Scribed in the technical documentation at its own discretion and without giving prior notice insofar as this is reason able for the user The same applies to any technical changes that serve the purpose of technical progress The receipt of technical documentation in particular user documentation does not constitute any further duty on the part of Phoenix Contact to furnish information on modifications to products and or technical documentation You are responsible to verify the suitability and intended use of the products in your specific application in particular with re gard to observing the applicable standards and regulations All information made available in the technical data is sup plied without any accompanying guarantee whether expressly mentioned implied or tacitly assumed In general the provisions of
231. nning Tree If Spanning Tree is not supported by all of the switches used the reconfiguration time for Spanning Tree is extended by the aging time of switches without Spanning Tree support A connection via one or more additional hubs that do not support Spanning Tree Furthermore a data path can also consist of a connection of a Spanning Tree switch to Atermination device A network segment in which no loops may occur which consists of several infrastructure components hubs or switches without Spanning Tree support 5 16 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 16 FL SWITCH HS Rapid Spanning Tree 22152215 For the last two data path options no specific precautionary measures are necessary If necessary the fast forwarding option can be used for the relevant ports see Section Fast forwarding on page 5 14 For the first three cases the following rules must be observed Rule t Spanning Tree transparency for all infrastructure components All infrastructure components used in your network that do not actively support Spanning Tree must be transparent for Spanning Tree messages BPDUs and must forward all BPDUs to all ports without modifying them When Spanning Tree is disabled the switch is transparent for BPDUs Rule 2 At least one active Spanning Tree component per loop An active Spanning Tree component su
232. ny constellation Operation of the Interface module in FL SWITCH GHS G Gigabit Modular Switches is possible without restriction Interface modules with older hardware status as the above mentioned can be operated in all modular switches Older replacement modules can be ordered according to revision Please contact your Phoenix Contact sales representative Hot plugging When inserting and removing interface modules you do not have to switch off the supply voltage The interface modules are detected automatically and logged to the network management If the FL IF 2FX ST D interface is removed and another interface type is inserted in its place the ports are set to auto negotiation 3 3 5 1 Default upon delivery When the interface modules are inserted they are preset with a data transmission rate of 100 Mbps and full duplex mode and link monitoring is not activated for the glass fiber ports If a glass fiber interface module is inserted in a MMS that has already been parameterized the existing configuration remains active The data transmission rate is set to 100 Mbps The duplex method is set to full duplex If the module is removed auto negotiation is enabled 3 3 5 2 Functions Line monitoring According to standard IEEE 802 3 the switch monitors the connected fiber optic cables for interrupts Ports that are not being used are considered cable interrupts In addition a gl
233. o the MMS Make sure that you know the password forthe configuration on the memory module 3 3 8 4 Functions of the twisted pair interface Auto negotiation Auto negotiation is a method whereby the switch automatically detects the operating parameters for the connected network and sets the corresponding parameters 10 Mbps 100 Mbps data transmission rate and half full duplex transmission mode for its RJ45 ports Automatic port setting eliminates the need for manual intervention by the user The auto negotiation function can be activated deactivated via the web interface Auto crossing There is no need to distinguish between 1 1 and crossover cables as the transmit and receive cables are crossed automatically Auto crossing is only available if auto negotiation is activated Auto polarity The polarity is changed automatically by the switch if a pair of twisted pair receive cables RD and RD are connected incorrectly Line monitoring The switch uses link test pulses according to standard IEEE 802 3 at regular intervals to monitor the connected TP TX cable segments for short circuits and interrupts Ports that are not being used are considered cable interrupts In addition a TP TX path to a deactivated termination device is also considered a cable interrupt as the connected device cannot send a link test pulse because it is switched off 3 3 8 5 Network connection See FL IF 2TX VS RJ on p
234. o the network only switch ports that receive STP BPDUs are set to STP mode All other ports that receive RSTP BPDUs remain in RSTP mode 5 2 4 Topology detection of a Rapid Spanning Tree network RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree switches continually exchange information about the network topology using special messages BPDUS Bridge Protocol Data Units In this way the Switches learn the current network topology and based on this information make the following decisions Which switch is selected as root switch Which data paths are disabled If a switch is started using the Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol it first expects to be the root Switch However no data communication is possible during the startup phase until the current network topology has been learned and until the decisions described above have been made Therefore loops which could otherwise occur during the network startup phase because no data path is interrupted are prevented 5 2 4 1 Topology modification A topology modification can be triggered by the following A Adding a data path Failure of a data path Adding a Spanning Tree switch Failure of a Spanning Tree switch A topology modification is automatically detected and the network is reconfigured so that another tree is created and all the devices in this tree can be accessed During this process loops do not even occur temporarily If the sending of traps was not deactivated two traps are gen
235. oard 1 2 5 Dimensions of the Modular Managed Switch System for normal operation ls 468 341 Y 214 Js 127 RN 127 DESENI a m Ord No 20 22326 ES E E E E E zd zi zi s 9 9 5 9 etur MM 5 6 6 EE 6 A e 68740013 114 5 A 0B e io o Lo 7 B 20 o 00 H li BH E ELA Y Y 1 10 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 16 The Modular Managed Switch System MMS and the Managed Compact Switch MCS
236. ocess MRP Manager mode is activated in the saved configuration of the MMS MCS the MRP manager function is automatically enabled f no manager function module is present during the boot process and the MRP manager is enabled in the saved configuration the device activates a safe state in which one of the ring ports is set to blocking mode to prevent loop generation An error message appears which would also be displayed in the event of a ring error informing the user of this configuration error After inserting the manager function module the manager can be reenabled manually or a reboot executed Ifa manager function module is removed during runtime the MRP manager can no longer be selected manager function module is removed while the MRP manager is active the mode remains active until the device is restarted or is switched to another mode client disabled 6874 en 16 PHOENIX CONTACT 6 1 FL SWITCH MM HS 6 2 1 Network examples LJ MRP manager wa I iis
237. ode OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 2 2 1 4 Syntax Integer Access Read Description Contains the duplex mode of the selected port No link 0 Full duplex 1 Half duplex 2 flWorkNetPortNegotiation OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 2 2 1 5 Syntax Integer Access Read Description Contains the duplex mode of the selected port Automatic 1 Manual 2 flWorkNetPortName OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 2 2 1 6 Syntax Octet string 0 16 Access Read and write Description Contains the name of the port e g Robot 1 flWorkNetPortEnable OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 2 2 1 7 Syntax Integer Access Read and write 6874 en 16 PHOENIX CONTACT 4 81 FL SWITCH MM HS Description Here you can disable the port Port disabled 1 Port enabled 2 flWorkNetPortLinkMonitoring OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 2 2 1 8 Syntax Integer Access Read and write Description This object can be used to enable link monitoring message via display and alarm contact for the relevant port Link monitoring enabled 2 Link monitoring disabled 1 flWorkNetPortModus OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 2 2 1 9 Syntax Integer32 0 1024 Access Read and write Description This object can be used to set the transmission mode for the relevant port Auto negotiation 1 10 Mbps half duplex 2 10 Mbps full duplex 3 100 Mbps half duplex 4 100 Mbps full duplex 5 1 Glass fiber FX ports only support operation at 100 Mbps full duplex 5 The auto crossing funct
238. of the POF SCRJ transceiver at this port flWorkNetPortPofScrjlfWavelength OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 2 4 1 17 Syntax Integer32 Access Read Description This object provides the wavelength in nm of the POF SCRJ transceiver at this port flWorkNetPortPofScrjlf TransceiverOptions OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 2 4 1 18 Syntax Integer32 Access Read Description This object provides the implemented functions of the POF SCRJ transceiver at this port as a bit pattern MSB LSB 31 30 6 2 1 0 A RATE SELECT implemented TX DISABLE implemented TX FAULT implemented E LOS implemented 681409058 flWorkNetPortPofScrjlfSerialNumber OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 2 4 1 19 Syntax Octet string Access Read Description This object provides the serial number of the POF SCRJ transceiver at this port flWorkNetPortPofScrjlfDatecodeAndLot OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 2 4 1 20 4 88 6874 16 Configuration and diagnostics Syntax Octet Access Read Description This object provides the manufacturing date and the delivery number of the POF SCRJ transceiver at this port as a byte pattern Byte 1 and 2 Year Byte 3 and 4 Month Byte 5 and 6 Day Byte 7 and 8 Delivery number flWorkFirmware OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 flWorkFWInfo OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 1 fIWorkFWInfoVersion OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 1 1 Syntax O
239. of the interface flWorkNetPortPriorityLevel OID Syntax Access Description 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 2 2 1 16 Integer Read and write Selects the priority level for incoming data packets Priority low 1 default 2 Priority high flWorkNetPortPofTransmittingPower OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 2 2 1 17 Syntax Integer Access Read Description For polymer fiber POF paths 20 m the transmission power must be reduced This object can be used to read the switch position on the interface module Transmission power unknown 1 Reduced transmission power switch position OFF 2 Normal transmission power switch position ON flWorkNetPortStpMode OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 2 2 1 18 6874 16 4 83 FL SWITCH HS Syntax Integer Access Read Description Specifies the port mode during redundancy operation Spanning Tree 1 Rapid Spanning Tree 2 flWorkNetPortPoETable OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 2 3 flWorkNetPortPoEEntry OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 2 3 1 Description Generates a table with a detailed description of the PoE port configuration flWorkNetPortPoEIndex OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 2 3 1 1 Syntax Integer32 1 1024 Access Read Description Specifies the port number of the selected port flWorkNetPortPoEPowerEnable OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 2 3 1 2 Syntax Integer Access Read and write Description Indicates the status of the
240. of these groups can be static groups 7 2 Enabling the web pages for multicast filtering in WBM Activate WBM for the switches e g using the Factory Manager Switch to the General Configuration menu then the User Interfaces page Activate Multicast Filtering and confirm by entering your password When activating Multicast Filtering under General Configuration User Interfaces the multicast mechanism is not activated In the WBM menu the Multicast page under which the function can be configured and activated is enabled 7 3 Static multicast groups Static multicast groups must be created manually on every switch and all ports that are used to contact group members need to be added The advantages of static groups are 1 Easy specification of network paths on which the multicast data traffic of known groups is limited 2 querier required see Query on page 7 7 The following marginal conditions must be observed Precise network documentation for path specification is required Possible redundant paths due to Spanning Tree must be taken into account during port assignment Fornetwork modifications during servicing or expansion the multicast data paths must be restored 6874 en 16 PHOENIX CONTACT 7 1 FL SWITCH HS Conversion 7 3 1 Current Multicast Groups web page The table on this web page provides an overview the current multicast groups created
241. on Management via Telnet on page 4 130 Set Spanning Tree Enabled on the following page in the Redundancy field and select Save Basic Switch Configuration HHHHHHHRRH KO K KK 0 X K KK KHHKK KKKKKKKKK HAC Address IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway IP Parameter Assignment Rapid Spanning Tree Current Vlan Status Vlan Mode Port Security flccess Control for Web Switch Operating Mode Web Interface Telnet Interface SNMP Interface Reset LOGOUT APPLY SAVE Enter Agent IP Address in decimal dot format e g 209 131 209 13 Figure 5 13 Activating Rapid Spanning Tree FL SWITCH 00 80 45 03 5 41 mtd 00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 lt BootP gt lt Redundancy WEB menus OFF RSTP OFF gt VLAN Transparent lt LAN Transparent gt lt Disable gt lt Disable gt lt Default gt lt Enable gt lt Enable gt lt Enable gt lt No reset 6874_en_16 PHOENIX CONTACT 5 15 FL SWITCH MM HS 5 2 5 Configuration notes for Rapid Spanning Tree In contrast to the Spanning Tree method the Rapid Spanning Tree method supports event controlled actions that are no longer triggered based on a timer If one cable fails link down the Rapid Spanning Tree method can respond more quickly to this failure and thus the switch over time can be kept low A link down or link up must be detected at the switch so that the RSTP switches can de
242. on this MMS These include multicast groups that are assigned as a result of IGMP snooping or groups that are statically created Current Multicast Groups VID Group Address Group Membership 1 01 00 5 00 18 08 Ports 1 8 TT TLL 1 01 00 5 00 19 21 Pots1 8 E EEEE AEA 3 01 00 5e 00 18 2d 7 01 00 5e 00 a8 a8 Ports 1 8 Note This web page wil be refreshed in 15 sec automatically change the interval at the web page Services Figure 7 1 Current Multicast Groups web page These checkboxes indicate which port has been assigned to each individual group Please note that all multicast groups that are known to the switch including the dynamically detected groups that have not been created manually are shown on this web page The overview for group membership is based on the dot qTpGroupTable SNMP group This table contains all groups static entries and IGMP and their members 7 3 2 Creating static multicast groups This web page is used to create and manage statically configured multicast groups In order to create a multicast group enter the MAC address provided see Multicast addresses on page 7 4 for the multicast group in the Multicast Group Address field add the ports of the data paths to the group members and confirm these entries by entering a valid password If a group address is entered as an IP address the IP address is c
243. on all switches involved R STP can be activated via web based management via the SNMP interface via the serial interface or via Telnet While learning the network topology the switch temporarily does not participate in network communication 5 2 1 1 Enabling with web based management Activate web based management for the switches e g using the Factory Manager Switch to the General Configuration menu then the User Interfaces page Activate the Rapid Spanning Tree function under Redundancy and confirm by entering your password When activating Rapid Spanning Tree MRP under User Interfaces the redundancy mechanism is not activated In the WBM menu the Rapid Spanning Tree MRP page under which the function can be configured and activated is enabled 5 2 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 16 FL SWITCH HS Rapid Spanning Tree User Interfaces Telnet Server C Disable Enable Web Server Disable Enable SNMP Agent C Disable Enable The modified adjustments become effective after saving the configuration and rebooting the device Web Pages Redundancy C Disable Enable Enabling the module Redundancy Protocols you get additional web pages to activate the Redundancy Protocols Protocol and to configure it Setting the redundancy mode to disable the Redundancy Protocols configuration will be restored to the default state and the Redundancy Pr
244. onverted into a multicast MAC address according to the specifications of IEEE 802 1 D p Overwriting a dynamic group with a static configuration means that a new port assignment for this group cannot be created dynamically Only deleting this group will enable port assignment for this group to be started dynamically The guidelines for converting multicast IP addresses into a multicast MAC address results in the mapping of different IP groups to the same MAC group Avoid the use of IP groups That do not differ in the first and second byte from the right Thatdiffer by 128 in the third byte from the right 7 2 6874 16 Multicast filtering a Port assignment The fourth byte from the right is always replaced by 01 00 5e during conversion See example below Because of the conversion from IP to MAC addresses you should avoid using IP addresses that differ with regard to the third byte from the right by 128 Example 3rd byte from the right 1st multicast IP address 228 0 117 216 2nd multicast IP address 230 22 117 216 Difference 128 Both multicast IP addresses are converted into the multicast MAC address 01 00 5e 1e 75 d8 The group is added to the list of existing static multicast groups This list which is displayed in a list box is referred to as dot1qStaticMulticastTable in SNMP Settings are not automatically saved permanently The acti
245. ord and then enter a new unique password By default upon delivery the password is private please note that it is case sensitive For security reasons the input fields do not display your password but instead displayed Change Password Enter old password Enter new password Retype new password The password must be between 4 and 12 characters long Attention The password will be sent over the network in unencrypted format Apply Figure 4 20 Change Password web page The password must be between four and twelve characters long Please note that the password is always transmitted via the network in unencrypted format Forgotten your password Call the Phoenix Contact phone number listed in the Appendix making sure you have the device serial number and MAC address to hand User Interfaces menu The following actions can be executed here Activation deactivation of the Telnet server Activation deactivation of the web server Activation deactivation of the SNMP agent Activation deactivation of the configuration pages for redundancy mechanisms Activation deactivation of the configuration pages for multicast filtering Activation deactivation of the configuration pages for VLAN Activation deactivation of the configuration pages for the DHCP relay agent With the activation deactivation of the configuration pages under
246. ority Default OOD000000000000000000000 Switch 5 Priority Default OD0000000000000000000000 Switch 9 Priority Default 2 amos 7 E E E E Switch 8 RA Di i a B Discarding port a Priority Default MN SP O Switch 7 Priority 40000 Figure 5 16 Example with fast ring detection The switches in the illustrated example are arranged in such a way that two devices at the central position are configured as the root bridge and as the backup root bridge via the priority The root bridge has the lowest priority the backup root bridge has the second lowest priority The root and the backup root bridge are connected together redundantly The remaining switches are networked in several rings in a ring topology The end points of the ring are implemented on the root bridge and on the backup root bridge The switch furthest away from the root bridge has a low priority as its default setting e g 40000 The advantage of this constellation is that the individual rings are not adversely affected in the event of an error 5 2 5 4 Method of operation of the Spanning Tree Protocol STP Components of a Spanning Tree domain Designated switch The switch that connects a specific LAN segment with the lowest path costs to the root Switch Root port The other switches set the port with the lowest path costs or with the highest total transmission speed as the root switch in the forwarding state 5 20
247. ort 2 are operating at 10 Mbps port 3 is operating at 100 Mbps and port 4 is not operating at all I M or 1 100 XIX2 7 1N 1 E3 ER 2 2 SENS xi AR MODE HI 1 100 FD ig E E 1 2 EB 2 Ae IL I 68740001 Figure 1 10 Example for status indicators 6874 en 16 PHOENIX CONTACT 1 13 FL SWITCH HS 1 3 2 Meaning of the 7 segment display MMS If the MMS has established a PROFINET connection a dot appears in the bottom right corner of the display 1 14 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 16 The Modular Managed Switch System MMS and the Managed Compact Switch 5 During error free operation Display Meaning XX PROFINET connection established between controller and MMS bo Extracting starting firmware boot 01 Sending BootP requests SC Parameterization data being saved to the plug in memory and the head station 03 Downloading firmware via TFTP 04 Loading firmware in the Flash memory that was loaded via the network 05 The recently loaded firmware was successfully saved in the Flash mem ory E Initializing f
248. ot closed 6 Error 7 flSwitchRSTPRingFailedPort OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 15 4 3 Syntax Integer32 Access Read Description This object specifies the number of the faulty port in the ring flSwitchRelayAgentDHCP OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 15 5 flSwitchRelayAgentDhcpCtrl OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 15 5 1 Syntax Integer Access Read and write Description This object can be used to set the status of the DHCP relay agent DHCP relay agent deactivated 1 DHCP relay agent activated 2 If DHCP is activated forthe assignment of IP parameters the DHCP relay agent is automatically deactivated flSwitchRelayAgentDhcplpAddress OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 15 5 2 Syntax IP address Access Read and write Description This object can be used to set the IP address of the DHCP server for the DHCP relay agent default 0 6874 en 16 PHOENIX CONTACT 4 121 FL SWITCH HS flSwitchRelayAgentDhcpStatus OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 15 5 3 Syntax Octet string 1 255 Access Read Description This object indicates the status of the DHCP relay agent The status is affected by flSwitchRelayAgentDhcpCtrl object The assignment mechanism for the IP parameters flSwitchRelayAgentDhcpRIdType OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 15 5 4 Syntax Integer IP address 1 MAC address 2 Access Read and write Description This object indicates whether the DHCP relay agent specifies its MAC address or its IP ad dress as the
249. ot ports The most favorable path is specified by minimizing all connection costs on the path to the root switch In addition transmission speeds can also serve as costs For the switch the path costs added by each port for every HOP the hop of a data packet from one point to the next are preset to a value of 19 default setting recommended for 100 Mbps and can be modified at any time by the user Selecting a designated port At every designated switch the port with the most cost effective data link in the direction of the root switch is called the designated port Port costs The port costs can be set according to two different standards 802 1D STP or 801 1W RSTP If in addition to Phoenix Contact devices devices from other manufacturers are also used it is recommended that the port costs are set according to a uniform standard The dot1dstpPathCostDefault SNMP object OID 1 3 6 1 2 1 17 2 18 can be used to change the standard that is used Table 5 2 Port costs according to 802 D Transmission speed Recommended value Recommended range 10 Mbps 100 50 600 100 Mbps 19 10 60 Table 5 3 Port costs according to 802 W Transmission speed Recommended value Recommended range 10 Mbps 2 000 000 200 000 20 000 000 100 Mbps 200 000 20 000 2 000 000 5 22 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 16 FL SWITCH HS Rapid Spanning Tree 5 2 5 6 Fl
250. ot1qFdbTable 1 dot1qFdbEntry 1 dot1qFdbld 2 dot1qFdbDynamicCount 2 dotiqTpFdbTable 1 dott qTpFdbEntry 1 dot1qTpFdbAddress 2 dot1qTpFdbPort 3 dot1qTpFdbStatus 3 dotiqTpGroupTable 1 dott qTpGroupEntry 1 dot1qTpGroupAddress 2 dot1qTpGroupEgressPorts 3 dot1qTpGroupLearnt 4 dot1qForwardAllTable 1 qForwardAllEntry 1 dot1 qForwardAllPorts 2 dot1 qForwardAllStaticPorts 3 dot1 qForwardAllForbiddenPorts 5 dot1qForwardUnregisteredTable 1 dot1 qForwardUnregisteredEntry 1 dot1 qForwardUnregisteredPorts 2 doti qForwardUnregisteredStaticPorts 3 dot1 qForwardUnregisteredForbiddenPorts 3 dot1qStatic 1 dotiqStaticUnicastTable 1 dot1qStaticUnicastEntry 1 dot1 qStaticUnicastAddress 2 dot1qStaticUnicastReceivePort 3 dotiqStaticUnicastAllovedToGoTo 4 dot1qStaticUnicastStatus 2 we wa 6874_en_16 PHOENIX CONTACT 4 63 FL SWITCH HS 2 dot1qStaticMulticastTable 1 dot1qStaticMulticastEntry 1 dot1 qStaticMulticastAddress 2 dotiqStaticMulticastReceivePort 3 dot1qStaticMulticastStaticEgressPorts 4 dot1qStaticMulticastForbiddenEgressPorts 5 dot1qStaticMulticastStatus 4 dotiqVLAN 1 dotiqVLANNumDeletes 2 dot1qVLANCurrentTable 1 dot1qVLANCurrentEntry 1 dott gVLANTimeMark 2 dot1qVLANIndex 3 dott qVLANFdbld 4 dot1qVLANCurrentEgress
251. otocols Protocol will be deactivated Look for menu item Switch Station Rapid Spanning Tree and Switch Station Media Redundancy Multicast Filtering Disable Enable Enabling the module Multicast Filtering you get additional web pages to modify various multicast adjustments Disabling the multicast web pages has no influence on the multicast configuration Look for menu Switch Station Multicast Virtual LAN Disable Enable Enabling the module Virtual Area Networks VLAN you get additional web pages to modify various VLAN adjustments Disabling the web pages has no influence on the VLAN configuration Look for menu item Switch Station VLAN DHCP Relay Agent Disable Enable By enabling the module DHCP Relay Agent you get an additional web page to activate deactivate the DHCP relay agent or modify settings of the DHCP relay agent Look for menu item Switch Station DHCP Relay Agent Web page refresh interval fi 0 s 05 up to 3600s The value 0 for the refresh interval disables the automatic refreshing Enter password Apply Figure 5 2 User Interfaces menu The previously created configuration is lost and the web pages for R STP are hidden if Redundancy is set to Disable on the User Interfaces web page following R STP configuration The previously created configuration is not lost but the web pages for R STP
252. oving interface modules you do not have to switch off the supply voltage The interface modules are detected automatically and logged to the network management 3 3 3 1 Default upon delivery When the interface modules are inserted the link monitoring function for the HCS ports is not activated An HCS port is set to 100 Mbps full duplex If an HCS port is removed the port mode is set to auto negotiation 3 3 3 2 Functions Line monitoring According to standard IEEE 802 3 the switch monitors the connected fiber optic cables for interrupts Ports that are not being used are considered cable interrupts In addition an HCS path to a deactivated termination device is also considered a cable interrupt as the connected device cannot send a link test pulse because it is switched off 3 3 3 3 Connecting the F SMA connectors just before connecting the connectors The same applies for the protective caps on the connectors 1 To prevent dirt from entering the connectors do not remove the dust protection caps until F SMAis a standardized fiber optic connection We recommend the use of easy to operate F SMA connectors with quick mounting connection from Phoenix Contact The connectors are secured on the interface module by manually tightening the screw collar 68740017 Figure 3 12 Connecting the F SMA connectors 6874 en 16 PHOENIX CONTACT 3 15 Product designation
253. owchart for specifying the root path Determine path to root switch Same path costs Yes Lowest path costs 2 Root path Same priority for switches bridge identification Highest priority for switch 2 Root path Highest priority for port 2 Root path Same priority for individual ports Lowest port number 2 Root path Path to root Switch is determined Figure 5 17 Flowchart for specifying the root path 5 2 5 7 Extended configuration It may be useful to actively specify the topology that is formed due to the Spanning Tree Protocol and to not leave it to the random MAC addresses of the switches involved Non blocking blocking data paths can thus be influenced and a load distribution specified It may also be useful to explicitly disable the Spanning Tree Protocol at ports that do not participate in Spanning Tree so as to benefit from the fast forwarding function The Spanning Tree Protocol must also be disabled at individual ports if two different network segments both using Spanning Tree are to be coupled via these ports without the two tree structures merging into a large Spanning Tree Specifying the root switch The root switch is assigned via the assignment of an appropriate priority for the Spanning Tree segment Set the highest priority lowest value in the Priority field on the STP Bridge Configuration page in WBM for the switch selected as the root switch Ma
254. pNeighStateUps 1 2 3 4 5 2 egpNeighStateDowns egpNeighintervalHello egpNeighintervallPoll egpNeighMode x 15 egpNeighEventTrigger 1 1 1 1 6 egpAs 4 3 3 9 Transmission group 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 10 transmission 4 3 3 10 Simple Network Management Protocol group 1 3 6 1 2 1 11 The Simple Network Management Protocol group has mandatory characters for all systems In SNMP devices which are optimized to support either a single agent or a single management station some of the listed objects will be overwritten with the value O 11 snmp 1 snmpInPkts 2 snmpOutPkts 3 snmplnBadVersions 4 snmpInBadCommunityName 5 snmpInBadCommunityUses 6 snmpInASNParseErrs 8 snmplnTooBigs 9 snmpInNoSuchNames snmpInBadValues snmplnReadOnlys snmplnGenErrs snmplnTotalReqVars snmplnTotalSetVars snmplnGetRequests 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 snmpInGetNexts 1 1 1 1 4 4 We SS SS SS we 6874_en_16 PHOENIX CONTACT 4 53 FL SWITCH HS snmpInSetRequests snmpInGetResponses 4 3 4 RMON MIB 1 3 6 1 2 1 16 This part of the MIB continuously provides the network management with up to date and historical network component data The configuration of alarms and events controls the evaluation of network compon
255. pOutDiscards ipOutNoRoutes ipReasmTimeout ipReasmReqds ipReasmOKs ipReasmFails ipFragOKs ipFragFails ipFragCreates i 20 ipAddrTable 1 ipAddrEntry 1 ipAdEntAddr 2 ipAdEntlfindex 3 ipAdEntNetMask 4 ipAdEntBcastAddr 5 ipAdEntReasmMaxSize 21 ipRouteTable 1 ipRouteEntry 1 ipRouteDest 2 ipRoutelflndex 3 ipRouteMetric1 4 ipRouteMetric2 5 ipRouteMetric3 6 ipRouteMetric4 7 ipRouteNextHop 8 ipRouteType 9 ipRouteProto 10 ipRouteAge 11 ipRouteMask 12 ipRouteMetric5 13 ipRoutelnfo d 22 ipNetToMediaTable 1 ipNetToMediaEntry 4 50 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874_en_16 Configuration and diagnostics 1 ipNetToMedialflndex 2 ipNetToMediaPhysAddress 3 ipNetToMediaNetAddress 4 ipNetToMediaType 23 ipRoutingDiscards 4 3 3 5 ICMP group 1 3 6 1 2 1 5 The Internet Control Message Protocol group has mandatory characters for all systems It contains information about troubleshooting and control in Internet data traffic 5 icmp icmplnTimestampReps icmpInAddrMaskReps icmpOutMsgs icmpOutErrors icmpOutDestUnreachs icmpOutTimeExcds icmpOutParmProbs icmpOutSrcQuenchs 6874_en_16 PHOENIX CONTACT 4 51 FL SWITCH HS 4 3 8 6 Transfer Control Protocol group 1 3 6 1 2 1 6 The Transfer Control Protocol group ha
256. peration of the Interface module in FL SWITCH GHS G Gigabit Modular Switches is possible without restriction Interface modules with older hardware status as the above mentioned can be operated in all modular switches Older replacement modules can be ordered according to revision Please contact your Phoenix Contact sales representative Hot plugging When inserting and removing interface modules you do not have to switch off the supply voltage The interface modules are detected automatically and logged to the network management If the FL IF 2FX SM SC interface is removed and another interface type is inserted in its place the ports are set to auto negotiation 3 3 4 1 Default upon delivery When the interface modules are inserted they are preset with a data transmission rate of 100 Mbps and full duplex mode and link monitoring is not activated for the fiber optic ports If a fiber optic interface module is inserted in a MMS that has already been parameterized the existing configuration remains active The data transmission rate is set to 100 Mbps The duplex method is set to full duplex If the module is removed auto negotiation is enabled 3 3 4 2 Functions Line monitoring According to standard IEEE 802 3 the switch monitors the connected fiber optic cables for interrupts Ports that are not being used are considered cable interrupts In addition a fiber optic path
257. port in relation to the PoE function The port can supply power on request 1 The port does not supply power on request 2 The PoE status is unknown and cannot be set 3 flWorkNetPortPoECurrentLimitation OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 2 3 1 3 Syntax Integer Access Read and write Description This object is used to set the PoE current limitation Limitation to Class 1 devices or 90 mA 1 No limitation up to the maximum permissible value 350 mA 2 The PoE status is unknown and cannot be set 3 flWorkNetPortPoEDeviceClass OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 2 3 1 4 Syntax Integer 0 5 Access Read 4 84 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 16 Configuration and diagnostics Description This object contains the detected PoE class of the connected device to the selected port Class 0 0 Class 1 1 Class 2 2 Class 3 3 Class 4 4 Class 5 5 flWorkNetPortPoEOutputCurrent OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 2 3 1 5 Syntax Integer 1 400 Access Read Description This object contains the current value of the output current in mA of the selected port flWorkNetPortPoEOutputVoltage OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 2 3 1 6 Syntax Integer32 45000 56000 Access Read Description Indicates the current output voltage at this port in mV flWorkNetPortPoEFaultStatus OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 2 3 1 7 Syntax Integer Access Read Description Here you can view the current error status of the port No error 0 Error in the external PoE suppl
258. pports the Spanning Tree Protocol sends receives and evaluates BPDUS and sets its ports to the relevant STP states Each loop in a network must have at least one active Spanning Tree component to disintegrate the loop Switch 4 Priority 40000 Example b b el Switch 3 Switch 1 m Priority Default Root bridge SESS switch 42 iority puNECT Priority 0 Priority Default deel le mes 5 Priority 40000 4 E 4 1 E t E Switch 6 pum T Hao E Switch 2 Priority Default E T i H Backup root bridge 89 4000 B i m 427144 Switch 10 Priority Default DODO00000000000000000000 Switch 5 E Priority Default 1 Switch 9 RE Priority Default z N MEIST JE UR Bm T TU dur Switch 8 A Discarding port Priority Default
259. queue are made All residual data is assigned to the low priority queue 3 4 4 2 Port prioritization In addition to the processing sequence according to the priority information from the tag the user can set the internal prioritization for every individual switch port at the MMS MCS In this way the processing of Ethernet data for a particular port can be prioritized The port prioritizing method is suitable for termination devices that do not support tagging and thus cannot generate priorities High port prioritization sets the internal priority of the packets received at this port to priority level 7 In the switch these packets will be processed with priority information 7 within the tag preferred handling and forwarding method only within the switch however when forwarding to the receiver the packets are in the original state The Low port prioritization means that the priority of packets received at this port is not influenced by the switch This implies that existing tags must be taken into consideration or that other priority rules must be observed 3 32 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874_en_16 Startup and functions Setting the port priority Port Configuration Port Number 2 Module HS Interface x1 Type 1x 10 100 Port Name Port2 Status Disable Enable Priority Level Low C High Figure 3 21 Setting the port priority Onthe Port Configuration web page bot
260. r RX system reserve POF SCRU Interface module is present but the system reserve is low the system reserve is less than 2 dB but greater than O dB POF SCRJ Interface module is present but the system reserve is exhausted no System reserve available the received optical power is below the required minimum value When you click on details under the port number detailed information about the transmit receive properties of the relevant port are displayed in the window that appears 4 30 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 16 Configuration and diagnostics Diagnosable POF interface detailed information Port Number fi gt Module HS Interface x1 Port Name Port 1 Port state System reserve exhausted Part system reserve 0 00 dB Port Rx Power 0 00 dBm Tx power 389 00 pv Warnings Power low Alarms Power low Back to the Port POF Table Figure 4 38 Diagnostics web page 6874_en_16 PHOENIX CONTACT 4 31 FL SWITCH MM HS EJ E a Ports Port Mirroring menu Activation deactivation and setting of port mirroring Port mirroring is used to passively read data that is being transmitted via a selected port To do this a measuring instrument PC is connected to the destination port which records the data yet must not itself be activated Port Mirroring Source Port Destination Port Mirroring Status Disable Enab
261. ration Look for menu iter Switch Station Multicast Virtual LAN Disable Enable Enabling the module Virtual Local Area Networks VLAN you get additional web pages to modify various adjustments Disabling the web pages has no influence on the VLAN configuration Look for menu item Switch Station VLAN DHCP Relay Agent Disable Enable By enabling the module DHCP Relay Agent you get an additional web page to activate deactivate the DHCP relay agent or modify settings of the DHCP relay agent Look for menu item Switch Station DHCP Relay Agent Web page refresh interval 0 s Os up to 36005 The value 0 for the refresh interval disables the automatic refreshing Enter password Apply Figure 4 21 User Interfaces web page Access Control menu Here you can specify the IP addresses from which access to the web interface is permitted To do so enter the IP address in dotted notation and select whether read only or read write access is to be assigned As an option another name can be assigned under Description Access to WBM can be configured for a maximum of ten IP addresses 4 20 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 16 Configuration and diagnostics Operating as a PROFINET device Access Control for Web Interface Access Control C Disable No IP Address Description Access C Read l Network Admin 2 Read Only Re
262. ration via the serial interface see Section Management via local V 24 RS 232 communication interface on page 4 123 When activating PROFINET mode the following default settings are made for operation TheLink Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP is enabled with the following configuration specifications for PROFINET components Message transmit interval 5 s Message transmit hold multiplier 2 TLV port ID with subtype locally assigned in the following format port xyz TLV chassis ID with subtype locally assigned transmits the station name The Discovery and Configuration Protocol DCP is activated as the mechanism for assigning IP parameters station name system name is deleted if the value for the System Name object contains the device type default upon delivery The MRP protocol is not activated In addition when switching to PROFINET mode the configuration is saved automatically and the device is restarted The switch then starts PROFINET mode for the first time and waits for and a PROFINET IP address to be assigned At this point the switch is already visible in the network via LLDP with the default name FL SWITCH MM HS and the IP address 0 0 0 0 Waiting for a valid IP configuration via DCP is indicated by the switch with dP in the display and by the flashing of the LED for the currently active mode The switch cannot be accessed via other network services such as ping at this time
263. rhood information changed at port xy neighbor information become obsolete at port xy Power over Ethernet fault detected at least one port No Power over Ethernet faults detected any more of the interface modules is not supported by the system hardware The interface will be able to send or receive data but cannot be diagnosed Profinet connection was established Profinet connection was terminated Diagnosable POF module OK on port xy Diagnosable POF module Warning level reached on port xy Diagnosable POF module Critical status on port xy A Configuration difference detected Configuration difference detected at slot Configuration difference removed MRP Client enabled MRP disable Manager enabled MRP disable MRP Ring failure detected MRP Ring closed OK Manager detects a closed loop Diagnostics MAC Address Table menu Here you will find a list of which MAC address has been detected at which switch port and its VLAN ID If no packets are received at a port for a duration longer than the aging time the entry is deleted 4 40 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874_en_16 Configuration and diagnostics Export as an Excel worksheet is possible via download Thus an efficient analysis option is available that is especially helpful in larger networks Mac Address Table No Mac Address Port 1 00 00 CB 53 50 31 1 You can download the Mac Addr
264. right corner in WBM The icon is linked to the Configuration Management web page The active configuration can be saved permanently by selecting Save current configuration on this web page 4 2 2 1 Structure of the web pages The web pages are divided into four areas Device type and device logo Device name assigned by the user and loading time to prevent mix ups Navigation tree on the left hand side nformation tables which contain current device information during runtime 4 10 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 16 Configuration and diagnostics 4 2 2 2 Password concept After having entered the valid password no further entry of the password is necessary for a period of 300 s default After this period of time has elapsed or after clicking on Logout the password must be re entered The period of time can be set using the fIWorkFWCtrlLoginExpire SNMP object within range of 30 s to 3600 s default 300 s The concept is valid for the first ten users logged on at the same time All other users must confirm each configuration modification by entering the password until less than ten users are logged on 4 2 3 Functions information in WBM The navigation tree provides direct access to the following four areas General Instructions Basic information about WBM Device Information General device information General Configuration Device configuration device as a network device Swit
265. riorityRegenTable 1 dotidUserPriority 2 dot dRegenUserPriority 3 dotidTrafficClassTable 1 dotidTrafficClassEntry 1 dotidTrafficClassPriority 2 dotidTrafficClass 4 dot1dPortOutboundAccessPriorityTable 1 dot1dPortOutboundAccessPriorityEntry 1 dotidPortOutboundAccessPriority 3 dot1dGarp 1 dotidPortGarpTable 1 dot1dPortGarpEntry 1 dot1dPortGarpJoinTime 2 dot1dPortGarpLeaveTime 3 dot1dPortGarpLeaveAllTime 4 dot1dGmrp 1 dotidPortGmrpTable 1 dot1dPortGmrpEntry 1 dot1dPortGmrpStatus 2 dottdPortGmrpFailedRegistrations 3 dot1dPortGmrpLastPduOrigin 4 3 6 2 pBridgeConformance 1 3 6 1 2 1 17 6 2 1 pBridgeGroups 1 pBridgeExtCapGroup 2 pBridgeDeviceGmrpGroup 3 pBridgeDevicePriorityGroup 4 pBridgeDefaultPriorityGroup 5 pBridgeRegentPriorityGroup 6 pBridgePriorityGroup 7 pBridgeAccessPriorityGroup 4 62 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 16 Configuration and diagnostics 8 pBridgePortGarpGroup 9 pBridgePortGmrpGroup 10 pBridgeHCPortGroup 11 pBridgePortOverflowGroup 2 pBridgeCompliances 1 pBridgeCompliance 4 3 7 qBridgeMIB 1 3 6 1 2 1 17 7 4 3 7 1 qBridgeMIBObjects 1 3 6 1 2 1 17 7 1 1 dotiqBase 1 dot1qVLANVersionNumber 2 dotiqMaxVLANId 3 dot gMaxSupportedVLANs 4 dotiqNumVLANs 5 dot1qGvrpStatus 2 dotiqTp 1 d
266. ront towards the mounting surface B Check that the positive latches have snapped on properly Figure 2 3 Mounting extension modules 2 Now that the extension module is snapped onto the DIN rail push it along the DIN rail towards the head station until the male connector female connector of the modules are interlatched and the sides of the modules lie flush with one another wi Removal E 0 lt lt IZ qe PHENIX sag 23 If II ma L FL SWITCH MM HS fet Ex Ex Ed m Ex m Ex m Es m Ex Ord No 28 32326 52 92 99 92 92 22 52 92 32 92 52 92 22 92 59 S o9 of 2509 99 95 99 o9 09 pos o o o 9 99 6 6 00A04518DD mics 9 mra eg 25 2222 2522 2222 5252 2255 ese f Mounting 68740004 Figure 2 4 Mounting removing extension modules 6874_en_16 PHOENIX CONTACT 2 3 FL SWITCH MM HS Removal NOTE Switch off the supply voltage before removing the extension modules 1 Remove all plug in connections or interface modules 2 Torelease the plug in connection for the system interface insert a screwdriver in the notch provided and use it to push the modules apart 3
267. rred OFF Alarm contact closed i e an error has not occurred A Link LED is located above the interface module slot for each port LNK Green ON Link active Link OFF Link inactive A second LED is provided above the interface module slot for each port on the MMS and on the front of the housing on the MCS The function of the second LED MODE for each port can be set using a switch on the device which controls all ports see also example below There are three options ACT Green ON Sending receiving telegrams Activity OFF Not sending receiving telegrams 100 Green ON 100 Mbps OFF 10 Mbps if Link LED is active FD Green ON Full duplex Duplex OFF Half duplex if Link LED is active ACT and 100 and FD Green Flashing PROFINET device identification simultaneously ACT or 100 or FD Green Flashing No IP parameter present following restart selected by mode switch 1 12 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 16 Modular Managed Switch System MMS and the Managed Compact Switch MCS Example In Figure 1 10 the LED indicators have the following meaning see also Assignment of ports to slots on page 1 11 A The switch has been set to display the duplex mode the mode LEDs now indicate that port 1 and port 3 are in full duplex mode and port 2 and port 4 are in half duplex mode B The switch has been set to display the data transmission rate the mode LEDs now indicate that port 1 and p
268. rs 10 Mbps 100 Mbps data transmission rate and half full duplex transmission mode for its RJ45 ports Automatic port setting eliminates the need for manual intervention by the user The auto negotiation function can be activated deactivated via the web interface Auto crossing There is no need to distinguish between 1 1 and crossover cables as the transmit and receive cables are crossed automatically 1 Auto crossing is only available if auto negotiation is activated Auto polarity The polarity is changed automatically by the switch if a pair of twisted pair receive cables RD and RD are connected incorrectly Line monitoring The switch uses link test pulses according to standard IEEE 802 3 at regular intervals to monitor the connected TP TX cable segments for short circuits and interrupts Ports that are not being used are considered cable interrupts In addition a TP TX path to a deactivated termination device is also considered a cable interrupt as the connected device cannot send a link test pulse because it is switched off 3 3 6 4 Network connection The switch position for transmission power reduction will only be indicated in the web interface in future hardware versions See Assignment of F SMA ports to the DIP switch on page 3 14 and onwards and Reducing the transmission power on page 3 13 and onwards 3 3 7 FL IF TX HCS 100 1 Hot plugging When inserting and removin
269. ry by entering a valid password Set default upon delivery After setting the delivery status the device accomplishes a reboot automatically Enter password Execute Figure 4 26 Set default upon delivery web page WBM can only be called using a valid IP address Once the switch has been reset to its default settings it has no valid IP address and the addressing mechanism is set to BootP 4 22 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 16 Configuration and diagnostics Load the last stored configuration Configuration file transfer jie This option can be used to reactivate the last configuration saved in the memory module on the device All modifications made to the configuration since it was last saved are lost Load the last stored configuration The device accomplishes a reboot to load the last stored configuration Enter password Load Figure 4 27 Load the last stored configuration web page Config Management File Transfer menu This option can be used to save your device configuration on a PC or to operate the switch using a saved configuration Configuration file transfer TFTP server IP address 0 0 0 0 File Direction C device to host host to device Status of the transfer No information available After successful file transfer from the host to the device the switch must be rebooted to activate the new conf
270. s started Redundant connections can now be created R STP Configuration Rapid Spanning Tree Status Disable Enable Large Tree Support Disable Enable Fast Ring Detection Disable Enable Bridge Priority 32768 0 up to 61440 in steps of 4096 This bridge uses the following parameter if this bridge is the root bridge Maximum Age of STP Information 20 Bs up to 40s Hello Time 2 s 1s up to 10s Forward Delay 15 s 4s up to 30s Enter password m Apply Figure 5 4 R STP Configuration 5 4 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 16 FL SWITCH HS Rapid Spanning Tree Large Tree Support If RSTP is operated using the default values itis suitable for up to seven switches along the relevant path see Figure 5 19 on page 5 25 and Figure 5 20 on page 5 26 as an example for the relevant path The RSTP protocol would therefore be possible in a ring topology for up to 15 switches The Large Tree Support option makes the ring topology suitable for 28 switches along the relevant path if RSTP is used The large tree support option could provide an RSTP ring topology with up to 57 devices When using large tree support please note the following Inthe large tree support RSTP topology do not use devices that do not support large tree support Enable the large tree support option on all devices f RSTP is to be activated as the redundancy mechanism in an existing network with more t
271. s also possible to deactivate monitoring in web based management or via SNMP PHCENIX ACT 100 FD SE FL SWITCH MM HS Ord No 28 32 326 le Reset 051 Apes 5 Fail US1 GND US2 GND RI R2 24 Figure 2 17 Supplying the system using one voltage source 6874 en 16 PHOENIX CONTACT 2 11 FL SWITCH MM HS Redundant 24 V DC supply acr w CONTACT 0 FL SWITCH HS Ord No 28 32326 O Reset FE mus Pn 00A0451BDD 052 Fail US1 GND 52 GND Figure 2 18 Supplying the system using two voltage sources 2 7 3 Alarm contact The switch has a floating alarm contact An error is indicated when the contact is opened 67840015 Figure 2 19 Basic circuit diagram for the alarm contact The indicated error states are configured in web based management or via SNMP For a list of error states that can be configured please refer to Section Diagnostics Alarm Contact menu on page 4 37 In the event of non redundant power supply the switch indicates a supply voltage failure by opening the alarm contact This error message can be prevented by connecting the supply voltage to both terminals in paralle
272. s created for management Make sure that the administrator has access to this VLAN Warnings displayed when creating configuring VLANs indicate configuration errors port belongs to multiple VLANs The port assignment untagged and PVID do not match In order to create VLAN the switches involved must be configured accordingly In the following example data traffic is to be enabled in VLAN 5 between termination devices A and B The type of termination device must be taken into consideration VLAN compatible processes tags or not VLAN compatible does not process tags In the example two types of termination device are take into consideration 6874 en 16 PHOENIX CONTACT 8 7 FL SWITCH HS Figure 8 5 Switch 2 Port 2 PVID X Prio X participant VLAN 5 acu 354 55 85 R8 with Tags eo Switch 2 Port 3 participant VLAN 5 PVID X Prio X with Tags Switch configuration Set both switches to VLAN Tagging mode save and restart devices Create VLAN 5 on switch 1 and specify port 7 as an untagged member and port 1 as 1 2 3 4 a tagged member Device participant VLAN 5 without Tags Switch 1 Port 7 PVID 5 Prio 4 participant VL
273. s mandatory characters for all systems with implemented TCP Instances of objects which provide information about a specific TCP connection are valid as long as the connection is established 6 tcp 1 tepRtoAlgorithm 2 tcpRtoMin 3 tepRtoMax 4 tepMaxConn b tcpActiveOpens 6 tcpPassiveOpens 7 tcpAttemptFails 8 tcepEstabResets 9 tcpCurrEstab 10 teplnSegs 11 tepOutSegs 12 tepRetransSegs 13 tepConnTable 1 tepConnEntry 1 tepConnState 2 tepConnLocalAddress 3 tepConnLocalPort 4 ttpConnRemAddress 5 tepConnRemPort 14 tcpInErrs 15 tcpOutRsts 1 4 1 1 4 4 3 3 7 User Datagram Protocol group 1 3 6 1 2 1 7 The User Datagram Protocol group has mandatory characters for all systems that implement UDP 7 udp 1 2 3 4 5 1 udplnDatagrams udpNoPorts udpinErrors udpOutDatagrams udpTable udpEntry 1 udpLocalAddress 2 udpLocalPort 2 2 4 52 6874 16 Configuration and diagnostics 4 3 38 group 1 3 6 1 2 1 8 8 egp 2 3 4 5 1 egplnMsgs egpinErrors egpOutMsgs egpOutErrors egpNeighTable egpNeighEntry 1 egpNeighState 2 egpNeighAddr 3 egpNeighAs 4 egpNeighInMsgs 5 egpNeighlnErrs 6 egpNeighOutMsgs 7 egpNeighOutErrs 8 egpNeighInErrMsgs 9 egpNeighOutErrMsgs 0 eg
274. s the root port 5 2 5 5 Processes in the Spanning Tree Protocol STP Selecting the root switch On every topology modification each switch first assumes that it is the root switch and thus sends its own switch ID e g the MAC address into the network All switches receive these messages MAC multicast and store the contents of the best message The best message consists of the following topology information the root ID information and the cost information Having received the root ID information the switch compares the following new root ID is saved if it has a higher priority than the IDs that are already saved including its own ID The path costs are checked if the root ID is the same as the one already saved If they are lower the ID is saved root ID and the costs are the same the ID of the sender is checked If the ID is lower than the switch s own ID it is saved root ID costs and sender ID are the same the priority of the sender port is the decisive criterion Selecting a designated switch For every network the switch with the most favorable root connection is selected this switch is called the designated switch The root switch is the designated switch for all directly connected networks 6874 en 16 PHOENIX CONTACT 5 21 FL SWITCH MM HS Selecting a root port Once the root switch has been specified by processing the root IDs the switches now specify the ro
275. s to basic information However the V 24 RS 232 interface also enables firmware update via XMODEM in the event of faulty firmware Settings are not automatically saved permanently The active configuration can be saved permanently by selecting Save current configuration on the Configuration Management web page 4 1 Factory Manager 4 1 1 General function The integration of the MMS MCS in the Factory Manager provides optimum support for configuration and management 4 1 2 Assigning IP parameters Only one of several options for assigning IP parameters using Factory Manager 2 2 is described here Once you have established all the necessary connections and Factory Manager has been started start the MMS MCS or execute a reset Following the boot phase the MMS MCS sends the BootP requests which are received by the Factory Manager and displayed in the message window If you are operating other devices in the same network messages from these devices may also be displayed Messages from Phoenix Contact Factory Line components can be easily identified by their MAC address which starts with 00 A0 45 and is provided on the devices Please check the MAC address in the messages to ensure the correct device is addressed 6874 en 16 PHOENIX CONTACT 4 1 FL SWITCH MM HS I Robot Control ncf Factory Manager Configuration View Device Messages Special Tools Licensing 58
276. saved is indicated on the Configuration Management web page 3 3 8 1 Parameterization memory default upon delivery By default upon delivery the parameterization memory is empty see Default upon delivery default settings on page 3 1 3 3 8 2 Twisted pair interface default upon delivery When the interface modules are inserted the auto negotiation and auto crossing functions are activated Link monitoring for the twisted pair ports is not activated If an interface module is inserted in a MMS that has already been parameterized the existing configuration remains active 3 3 8 3 Function of the memory module When saving data to the Flash memory of the device the data is also transmitted to plugged in memory module If the user resets the module to the settings default upon delivery the configuration is also saved on the memory module See Default upon delivery default settings on page 3 1 6874 en 16 PHOENIX CONTACT 3 23 Product designation Datais stored to the Flash memory of the head station and in the memory module After a system startup On request by the user When starting the MMS the data is read from a plugged in memory module display indicates OP and used as the active configuration The data in the Flash memory is overwritten by the data from the memory module Please note that the password stored on the memory module is also transmitted t
277. scription OID trapPofScrjPort 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 3 0 7 Sent the event of switch over to or from a critical state trapPoEPort 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 3 0 8 Always sent if the error status of a PoE port changes trapManagerConnection 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 3 0 99 This trap is used to test the connection between the device and trap manager flWorkNet 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 flWorkNetlfParameter 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 1 flWorkNetlfParamPhyAddress 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 1 1 MAC address Read Contains the MAC address of the switch flWorkNetlfParamIPAddress 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 1 2 address Read and write Contains the current IP address of the MMS Modifications only take effect once the fl WorkNetlfParamSave object has been executed The flWorkNetlfParamAssignment object must be set to static 1 otherwise objects cannot be written flWorkNetifParamSubnetmask 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 1 3 4 78 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 16 Configuration and diagnostics Syntax IP address Access Read and write Description Contains the current subnet mask of the MMS Modifications only take effect once the fl WorkNetlfParamSave object has been executed The flWorkNetlfParamAssignment object must be set to static 1 otherwise objects cannot be written flWorkNetlfParamGwlpAddress OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 1 4 Syntax IP address
278. send SNMP traps function Sending permitted 2 Sending not permitted 1 fIWorkFWCtrlTrapLink 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 2 4 Integer Read and write Here you can specify that the LinkUp Down trap is extended to include a physical port number Without extension 2 With extension fIWorkFWCtrlTrapConnectionTest 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 2 5 Integer Read and write Here test traps can be sent for a connection test by the SNMP agent Sending test traps 2 No test traps 1 fIWorkFWCtrlTrapEnableTable 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 2 10 flWorkFWCtrlTrapEnableEntry OID Syntax Access Description 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 2 10 1 Generates table with information about the traps fIWorkFWCtrlTrapEnablelndex OID Syntax Access Description 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 2 10 1 1 Integer32 Read This object identifies the trap using the trap ID flWorkFWCtrlTrapEnableOid OID Syntax Access Description 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 2 10 1 2 Object identifier Read Indicates the trap OID 4 94 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 16 Configuration and diagnostics flWorkFWCtrlTrapEnableName OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 2 10 1 3 Syntax Display string Access Read Description This object identifies the trap using the trap name flWorkFWCtrlTrapEnableStatus OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 2 10 1 4 Syntax Integer Access Read write Description This object in
279. sh Space Bar to select and reset the switch 68740012 Figure 4 54 Reset to default settings This screen can be used to reset the switch to the settings default upon delivery or to restart it This screen can be opened by first setting the Reset Switch option or the Reset Switch to factory defaults option in the Basic Switch Configuration screen and then selecting Apply or Save This undoes any changes to the configuration and resets all IP parameters to the settings default upon delivery see Section 3 1 1 on page 3 1 Resetting to the default settings also resets the password to private For security reasons we recommend you enter a new unique password 4 126 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 16 Configuration and diagnostics 4 4 3 Starting with faulty software firmware If the software firmware installed on the MMS MCS is faulty you can restore or update the firmware using an update Observe the 7 segment display see also 1 3 2 Meaning of the 7 segment display MMS Procedure Connect the switch to your PC via the serial V 24 RS 232 interface Make sure that your HyperTerminal is configured correctly see configuration on page 4 123 Restart the switch gt Phoenix Contact Modular Managed Switch System Phoenix Contact GmbH amp Co KG www phoenixcontact com BIOS version X XX Press any key to stop booting 1 ENTER TO DOWNLOAD SW
280. st Mode System Time 13h 10m 39s 770ms UTC System Date Wednesday 2008 February 20 Enter password Apply Figure 4 18 Simple Network Time Protocol Configuration menu For the times in the event table for example make sure that the system time corresponds to Greenwich Mean Time The current local time is based on the system time and the UTC Offset Configuration sequence e Activate the SNTP function Enable e Set the desired time zone with UTC Offset e Under Pollinterval select the time slot pattern in which the system time is to be updated e Select the operating mode Either Unicast Mode The client receives its time from a fixed primary server Broadcast Mode The client receives its time from broadcast messages which were transmitted by an NTP server and sent to several clients Manycast Mode The client sends a broadcast message to several NTP servers The client selects the best response from the servers and then operates in unicast mode 6874 en 16 PHOENIX CONTACT 4 17 FL SWITCH MM HS jit t 4 2 3 5 Software Update menu This page is used to view or modify the parameters for a software update and to trigger the update Software Update TFTP Server Address Su 0 0 0 0 Downloadable File Name fi TFTP Update Status No information available To start the new software the device must be rebooted Note The device reboots with the l
281. string 6 Read Contains the boot loader release as a string Example for beta 0x62 0x65 0x64 0x61 flWorkFWInfoBootDate 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 1 8 Octet string 6 Read Contains the creation date of the boot loader version as a string Example for 09 03 01 0x30 0x39 0x30 0x33 0x30 0x31 flWorkFWInfoBootTime 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 1 9 Octet string 6 Read Contains the creation time of the boot loader version as a string Example for 14 10 20 0x31 0x34 0x31 0x30 0x32 0x30 4 90 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874_en_16 Configuration and diagnostics OID Syntax Access Description OID Syntax Access Description OID Syntax Access Description OID OID OID Syntax Access Description OID flWorkFWInfoOperStatus 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 1 11 Integer Read Contains the operating state of the firmware Problem 3 No error 2 Other 1 flWorkFWInfoHealthText 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 1 12 Display string Read Contains additional information error states for the firmware flWorkFWiInfoDisplay 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 1 13 Display string Read Contains the current data from the diagnostic display fIWorkFWCtrl 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 flWorkFWCirlBasic 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 1 fIWorkFWCtrlReset 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 1 1 Integer Read and write With write access a reset can be executed with 2 With read access the value is alw
282. t Clear information You can label your device clearly using the large labeling field and read operating states and additional information from the two digit 7 segment display Two LEDs per port with switchable information ensure that you always have sufficient local information A web server and an SNMP agent are provided for diagnostics maintenance and configuration via the network A terminal access point can be used for local operation Port mirroring can be used to monitor data traffic on the network connections Modular structure of the MMS Depending on your requirements you can create a compact switch for the control cabinet with convenient connections on the front or a switch for the terminal box with connections atthe bottom Itis also possible to add a glass fiber interface or extend your existing station from 8 16 ports to a maximum of 24 ports Figure 1 2 Possible system hardware The switches can be operated in PC WorX and Step 7 environments as conformance class B PROFINET IO devices Connections to PLC systems can be easily implemented for diagnostic and communication applications 1 2 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 16 The Modular Managed Switch System MMS and the Managed Compact Switch 5 Ethernet IP Smart mode Central element FL SWITCH MM HS In the Ethernet IP environment the switches support the IGMP snooping function and multicast filtering For easy configuration the switches support Sm
283. t RSTP discarding HS 4 edge port RSTP discarding 5 edge port RSTP discarding 6 RSTP discarding x4 p edge port RSTP forwarding 8 edge port RSTP discarding Note This web page will be refreshed 22 sec automatically change the interval at the web page Device Configuration User Interfaces Figure 5 5 R STP Port Table Oper Edge Port All ports that do not receive any R STP BPDUS e g termination device ports become edge ports i e ports that go to the Forwarding state immediately after restart Protocol Indicates the redundancy protocol used R STP State Indicates the current R STP state of the relevant port Possible states Forwarding The port is integrated in the active topology and forwards data Discarding This port does not take part in data transmission Learning This port does not take part in data transmission of the active topology however MAC addresses are learned Blocking Discarding The port has a link but has not been set to the Discarding state by RSTP 5 6 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 16 FL SWITCH HS Rapid Spanning Tree gt R STP Port Configuration Table R STP Port Configuration Table Module Interface Port STP Enable Priority 1 enable 128 x1 2 enable 128 3 enable 128 x2 4 enable 128 HS 5 enable 128 x3 6 enable 128 1 enable 128
284. t VLANs web page provides an overview of the VLANS currently created In addition refer to the table for the VLAN in which the switch is actually managed see also IP Configuration web page on page 4 13 All static and dynamic VLANs are listed here A distinction is made between tagged T and untagged U group members as well as non members see possible states on page 8 5 Current VLANs VID Status Group Membership static Ports 1 8 uuuuuuuu 1 Management Vlan Ports 9 16 UUUUUUUWU Ports 1 8 12 static Dans oM aD 24 static Ports 9 16 T TU T Tagged U Untagged Non Member This table indicates out of which ports each VLAN s data is to be sent using configuration data entered manually Le web page Static VI ANs or entered automatically from GVRP Note This web page wil be refreshed in 23 sec automatically change the interval at the web page Device Configuration User Interfaces Figure 8 2 Current VLANs web page When the maximum number of created VLANs static and or dynamic is reached the following text appears below the key for the member states The switch supports only 32 VLANs Further VLANs will be refused i VLAN 1 is always created statically and all ports are added to it as untagged members 8 4 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 16 FL SWITCH MM HS Virtual Local Area
285. t by the software to determine whether device 2 is located in the local subnetwork ANDing the subnet mask and IP address for device 2 Subnet mask 1111 1111 1111 1111 1100 0000 0000 0000 AND IP address 0101 1001 1110 1010 0101 0101 0011 0010 Result 0101 1001 1110 101 01 0 0000 0000 0000 Subnetwork After ANDing the software determines that the relevant subnetwork 01 does not correspond to the local subnetwork 11 and the datatelegram is forwarded to a subnetwork router 6874 en 16 PHOENIX CONTACT 3 7 Product designation 3 2 3 Flowchart after a restart 3 2 3 1 Loading the configuration data System start Memory module inserted Data in memory module valid Yes Data in head station Flash valid Load default values Load data from memory module Load data from head station Flash Boot process completed 4 Save data Figure 3 4 Flowchart Loading the configuration data 68740037 3 8 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 16 Startup and functions IP pa recei Boo 7009 IP parameters received from BootP server Entry of IP parameters as local configuration 3 2 3 2 Assigning IP parameters Operating as a PROFINET device with DCP Yes Assignment of static IP parameters via V 24 95 232 Device is started No up by the PROFINET IO controll
286. t byte of the subnet mask may only contain ones 3 6 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 16 Startup and functions The remaining bits three bytes then contain the address of the subnetwork and the computer The extended IP address is created when the bits of the IP address and the bits of the subnet mask are ANDed Because the subnetwork is only recognized by local devices the corresponding IP address appears as a normal IP address to all the other devices Application If the ANDing of the address bits gives the local network address and the local subnetwork address the device is located in the local network If the ANDing gives a different result the data telegram is sent to the subnetwork router Example for a Class B subnet mask Decimal representation 255 255 192 0 Binary representation 1111 1111 1111 1111 1100 0000 0000 0000 lj Subnet mask bits Class B 61462010 Using this subnet mask the TCP IP protocol software differentiates between the devices that are connected to the local subnetwork and the devices that are located in other subnetworks Example Device 1 wants to establish a connection with device 2 using the above subnet mask Device 2 has IP address 59 EA 55 32 IP address representation for device 2 Hexadecimal representation 59 EA 55 32 Decimal representation 0101 1001 1110 1010 0101 0101 0011 0010 61462011 The individual subnet mask and the IP address for device 2 are then ANDed bit by bi
287. t mechanism on BootP 2 or DCP 4 are only activated after a restart of the MMS MCS Address settings must be saved permanently using the fIWorkFWCtrlConfSave object flWorkNetlfParamManagementVlanid OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 1 8 Syntax Integer32 1 4094 Access Read and write Description If the switch is operated in Tagging VLAN mode this object indicates in which VLAN VLAN ID the management agent is located flWorkNetPort OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 2 flWorkNetPortCapacity OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 2 1 Syntax Integer32 1 1024 Access Read Description Contains the number of available ports depending on the configuration of the MMS flWorkNetPortTable OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 2 2 flWorkNetPortEntry OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 2 2 1 Description Generates a table with a detailed description of the port configuration flWorkNetPortIndex OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 2 2 1 1 4 80 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 16 Configuration and diagnostics Syntax Integer32 1 1024 Access Read Description Specifies the port number of the selected port flWorkNetPortLinkState OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 2 2 1 2 Syntax Integer Access Read Description Indicates the port status Connected 1 Not connected 2 farEndFault 3 flWorkNetPortSpeed OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 2 2 1 3 Syntax Gauge32 Access Read Description Contains the data transmission rate of the selected port in bps flWorkNetPortDuplexM
288. tains bridge specific information 4 3 5 2 1 2 3 4 dot1dBaseBridgeAddress dot1dBaseNumPorts dot1dBasePortType dot1dBasePortTable dotidBasePortEntry E dot1dBasePort up Ne dotidStp 1 3 6 1 2 1 17 2 dot1dStpProtocolSpecification dot1dStpPriority dot1idStpTimeSinceTopologyChange dotidStpTopChanges dot1dStpDesignateRoot dot1dStpRootCost dot1dStpRootPort dot1dStpMaxAge dotidStpHelloTime dot1 dStpHoldTime dot1 dStpForwardDelay doti dStpBridgeMaxAge dot1dStpBridgeHelloTime dot1 dStpBridgeForwardDelay dot1dStpPortTable 1 dotidStpPortEntry 1 dotidStpPort 2 dot1 dStpPortPriority 3 dottdStpPortState 4 dot1dStpPortEnable 5 dot1dStpPortPathCost 6 dotidStpPortDesignatedRoot 7 8 9 10 oP Or c m ee 7 dot1dStpPortDesignatedCost 8 dot1dStpPortDesignatedBridge 9 dot1dStpPortDesignatedPort 10 dotidStpPortForwardTransitions 11 dot1dStpPortPathCost32 dotidStpVersion dotidStpTxHoldCount dotidStpPathCostDefault 6 7 8 9 dot1dStpExtPortTable 1 1 1 1 ae 4 60 6874 16 Configuration and diagnostics 1 dot1dStpExtPortEntry 1 dot1dStpPortProtocolMigration 2 dot1dStpPortAdminEdgePort 3 dotidStpPortOperEdgePort 4 dotidStpPortAdminPointToPoint 5 dotidStpPortOperPointToPoint 6 dotidStpPortAdminPathCost 4 3 5 3 dotidTp
289. tchPortMirrSourcePort objects contains the value 0 or if they contain the same value e g both set to 2 flSwitchlgmp OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 15 3 flSwitchlgmpSnoop OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 15 3 1 flSwitchlgmpSnoopEnable OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 15 3 1 1 Syntax Integer Access Read and write Description Here the IGMP snooping function can be activated Deactivated 1 Activated 2 6874 en 16 PHOENIX CONTACT 4 117 FL SWITCH HS OID Syntax Access Description OID OID OID Syntax Access Description OID Syntax Access Description OID Syntax Access Description flSwitchlgmpSnoopAging 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 15 3 1 3 Integer 30 3600 Read and write Here the duration of the timeout period for the multicast groups dynamically learned via IGMP can be entered in seconds flSwitchlgmpSnoopTable 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 15 3 1 4 flSwitchlgmpSnoopEntry 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 15 3 1 4 1 flSwitchlgmpSnoopEgressPorts 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 15 3 1 4 1 1 PortList Read This object displays the ports that forward multicast data due to IGMP snooping flSwitchlgmpSnoopExtended flSwitchBlockUnknownMulticastAtQuerier 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 15 3 1 5 1 Integer Read and write If this function is activated the switch only forwards multicast packets if it received mem bership reports in advance Activated 2 Deactivated 1 flSwitchForwardUnknownMulticastToQuerier 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 15 3
290. tect a line failure and a restored line more quickly Please take into consideration in particular paths where media converters are used If required media converters offer setting options to transmit the link status of the fiber optic side to the twisted pair side If a link down is not detected at the switch because the cable interrupt is between the media converters and no link down is forced at the switch timer based detection is activated which may result in longer switch over times Forshort switch over times structure your network in such a way that a maximum of Seven switches are located in a cascade up to the root switch The switch over times can range from 100 ms to 2 s A Use priority assignment to specify a central switch as the root Itis also recommended to assign a switch as the backup root Forshort switch over times all switches in the redundant topology should support the Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol and should not use hubs 5 2 5 1 Connecting the switches to form a meshed topology Having activated Rapid Spanning Tree for all switches you can create a meshed topology with redundant data paths Any data links can now be created without taking loops into consideration Loops can even be added on purpose in order to create redundant links A data path between Spanning Tree switches can be Adirect connection A connection via one or more additional switches that do not support Spa
291. tem Up Time The Clear button can be used to delete entries in the event table The following events are listed in the event table Event Table cleared Password has been changed Password has not been changed successfully Configuration has been saved configuration has been modified the first time after the last storing Memory Module recognized Memory Module removed Memory Module cleared Configuration File Transfer successfully executed Configuration File Transfer was not successfully executed Firmware Update was successfully executed Firmware Update was not successfully executed Link up at port xy Link down at port xy Enabling port xy Disabling port xy Unpermitted mac address at port xy RSTP enabled RSTP disabled topology changed 6874 en 16 PHOENIX CONTACT 4 39 FL SWITCH HS RSTP elected this switch as new root IGMP Snooping enabled IGMP Snooping disabled IGMP Querier enabled IGMP Querier disabled Better query received Better query received vlan xy Become active querier Become active querier in xy GVRP enabled GVRP disabled Power Supply US1 lost Power Supply 052 lost Power Supply US1 and US2 are connected now LLDP Agent enabled LLDP Agent disabled recognized new neighbor at port xy LLDP neighbo
292. th Tagged status belong to the selected VLAN and packets are sent to this port with VLAN tag U Untagged Ports with Untagged status belong to the selected VLAN and packets are sent to this port without VLAN tag An Untagged port cannot belong to multiple VLANs otherwise there is no logical division except VLAN 1 F Forbidden Ports with Forbidden status do not belong to the selected VLAN and cannot be added dynamically to this VLAN via GVRP z None Ports with None status are not integrated into the VLAN 6874 en 16 PHOENIX CONTACT 8 5 FL SWITCH MM HS 8 4 2 VLAN Port Configuration Port specific VLAN settings can be made on this web page VLAN Port Configuration Port Number Module HS Interface Port Name Port 1 Port VLAN ID 1 v Port Priority Ingress Filtering Disable Enable GVRP Status Disable 9 Enable The Port VLAN ID and Port Priority will be assigned to any untagged data coming into this port Enter password Apply Port Configuration of port 1 General Security PoE R STP VLAN If Ingress Filtering is setto Enable the switch rejects data packets received at this port if is not a tagged member or untagged member of the VLAN with the VLAN ID contained in the tag of the packet Port Priority Acorresponding tag indicating the priority is added to packets without tags Port VLAN ID Assignment of received untagged packets to a VLAN
293. th from the switch to the trap receiver 4 2 3 4 SNTP Configuration menu General information about SNTP SNTP Simple Network Time Protocol is defined in RFC 4330 SNTP clients in automation technology and is used to synchronize the internal system time with any NTP server which represents the timer i e the universaltime The aim is to synchronize all the components in a network with the universal time and to thus create a uniform time base Time synchronization provides valuable assistance when evaluating error and event logs as the use of time synchronization in various network components enables events to be assigned and analyzed more easily Clients should therefore only be used at the most extreme points of an NTP network Time synchronization is carried out at fixed synchronization intervals known as polling intervals The client receives a correction time by means of an SNTP server with the packet runtime for messages between the client and server being integrated in the time calculation in the client The local system time of the client is thus constantly corrected Synchronization in the NTP is carried out in Universal Time Coordinated UTC format The current system time is displayed as Universal Time Coordinates UTCs This means thatthe displayed system time corresponds to Greenwich Mean Time The system time and the UTC Offset provide the current local time The switch supports the use of the SNTP protocol except i
294. the switch port to which the termination device is connected In addition the MMS MCS enters its own DHCP option 82 remote ID in the field The DHCP option 82 remote ID can be configured by the user and contains the IP or MAC address of the MMS 111 Activating the DHCP relay agent Enable the web page via General Configuration User Interfaces Activate the agent with Enable specify at least the IP address of the server The MMS MCS management does not start the relay agent while the switch is operating as a DHCP client 6874 en 16 PHOENIX CONTACT 11 1 FL SWITCH MM HS 11 1 0 1 Disabling the relay agent according to the port In firmware Version 4 50 or later the DHCP relay agent function can be disabled according to the port No DHCP option 82 packets are sent by the deactivated ports DHCP Relay Agent Status DHCP Server Address DHCP option 82 Remote ID Operating Status Active on ports 1 8 Disable Enable 0 0 0 0 IP Address O MAC Address DHCP Relay Agent has been disabled The switch able to act as DACP Relay Agent When acting as DHCP relay agent this switch will add an DACP option 82 field to every broadcasted DHCP Request or DHCP Discover it receives and will forward this modified message to the DHCP server you can configure on this web page After receiving reply from the DHCP server the switch will strip off the DHCP option 82 data and send the reply to the DHCP client
295. tion firmware Version 1 11 supports the Spanning Tree redundancy mechanism Firmware 2 03 offers the following additional functions Multicast filter mechanisms IGMP snooping and querier function Firmware 2 10 offers the following additional functions A Auto refresh of various WBM pages Extended multicast filtering multicast transmitters are detected and added to multicast groups 1 18 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 16 The Modular Managed Switch System MMS and the Managed Compact Switch 5 Extended IGMP snooping and IGMP query function switch passively reads IGMP membership reports creates corresponding multicast groups and sends IGMP queries to multicast groups Visualization of port capacity Port prioritization Firmware 3 04 offers the following additional functions VLAN support Rapid Spanning Tree support Security options port based security and access control for WBM Optimization of the password concept Event table logging of important events Representation of MAC address table in WBM Firmware 4 03 offers the following additional functions Optimized Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP improved switch over times Fastring detection Large tree support Support of LLDP topology detection DHCP support DHCP with option 82 relay agent PROFINET device function and DCP Simplified port configuration IGMP query Version 1 and 2
296. tions and no diagnostic data are available connected termination devices are nevertheless supplied with power The system bus firmware is displayed on the Device Information General web page The PoE configuration options also available if no PoE interface module is inserted If a PoE interface module is inserted the configuration is transmitted to the module after a few seconds Properties of POE mode Uptotwelve PoE interface modules with a total of 24 ports can be operated at the same time in a MMS Configuration transmission on the interface module is only possible if there is connected 48 V supply following management functions are available Display error states for each port and communicate via the alarm contact yes no Connect disconnect voltage for each port Current limitation for loads classified as Class 1 devices following diagnostic information is displayed No error Surge voltage undervoltage Thermal error Overload Disconnected load the current consumption at this port is less than 10 mA the supply voltage is disconnected by the PoE module No 48 V supply No PoE termination device connected No PoE interface module detected at this port No hardware support due to the system bus Detected class of a connected termination device Class 0 to Class 4 Output voltage and output current 6874 en 16 PHOENIX CONTACT 4 35 FL SWITCH MM HS
297. tionship has been successfully established between the switch and the control system the switch starts its management interface The 6874 en 16 PHOENIX CONTACT 9 5 FL SWITCH MM HS switch indicates that the PROFINET connection has been established correctly by an entry in the results table and the appearance of an additional dot in the bottom right corner of the display If the MMS has established a PROFINET connection a dot appears in the bottom right corner of the display 9 3 PROFINET alarms The MMS MCS can send the following alarms Redundant power supply missing management agent alarm MRP manager registered a ring interrupt management agent alarm Interface module removed slot specific alarm Link monitoring slot alarm for the relevant channel port POF SCRu diagnostic alarm for reaching and exceeding the warning threshold slot alarm for the relevant channel port All the alarms are deactivated when the device is started 9 6 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 16 Operating as a PROFINET device 9 3 1 Alarms in WBM In Profinet mode the Profinet Alarms web page appears in the navigation bar under Switch Station Diagnostics Here all alarms supported by the IO device can be activated The PROFINET alarms are sent to the control system by the IO devices From there they can be read from the diagnostics archive using DIAG Version 2 0 is included in Service Pack 1 for PC WorX 5 00 26
298. tistic counters of switch ports to zero Enter password L0 Port Configuration of port General Security PoE 5 VLAN Note This web page wil be refreshed in 22 sec automatically change the interval at the web page Device Configuration User Interfaces Port Statistics web page Ports POF Port Table menu 6874 en 16 PHOENIX CONTACT 4 29 FL SWITCH HS The information available for the POF SCRJ interface modules is displayed on this page POF SCRJ transceiver diagnostics Port Table Module Interface Port Vth RX system reserve status No diagnosable 1 POF module details plugged on this port No diagnosable 2 POF module details plugged on this port No diagnosable 3 POF module details plugged on this port x2 No diagnosable 4 POF module HS details plugged on this port 5 System Reserve is details 970 dB 6 System reserve System Reserve is details exhausted 0 00 dB r r SE r Figure 4 37 POF SCRJ transceiver diagnostics Port Table web page The following states can be displayed under Transceiver status System Hardware does not support diagnosable POF modules this hardware does not support POF SCRJ diagnostics POF SCRu Interface modules present no POF SCRJ module is plugged in POF SCRU Interface module is present and OK the system reserve is greater than 2 dB and is displayed unde
299. to server 3 If the new configuration is not activated by a reset after a configuration download when the configuration is saved the previously loaded configuration is rejected and instead the active configuration of the MMS MCS is saved flWorkFWRunningConfig 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 5 10 6 Integer Read This object can be used to request the status of the configuration data transmission Not started Transmission in progress Transmission successful Connection error Incorrect file path name Error 4 100 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 16 Configuration and diagnostics flWorkFWCtrlConfigMemoryModule 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 5 11 fIWorkFWCtrlConfMemoryModuleStatus OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 5 11 1 Syntax Integer Access Read Description This object can be used to request the status of the MMS MCS memory module Memory module present 1 Memory module working to full capacity 2 Memory module not supported 3 Memory module not present 4 Faulty memory module 5 fIWorkFWCtrlConfMemoryModuleClear OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 5 11 2 Syntax Integer Access Read and write Description Here the memory module can be deleted Not deleted 1 Delete memory module 2 fIWorkFWCtrlConfMemoryModuleCompare OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 5 11 3 Syntax Integer Access Read and write Description Here the configuration comparison between the MMS MCS and memory module can be triggered No comparison 1
300. top LED always indicates the LINK while the bottom LED display is set with the function switch Function switch for LEDs The MODE function switch can be used to specify which information is displayed by the second port specific LED The three LEDs below the switch indicate the selected mode This information is then displayed by all port specific LEDs see also example on page 1 13 Mini DIN V 24 RS 232 V 24 RS 232 interface in Mini DIN format for local configuration via the serial interface Alarm contact The floating alarm contact can be connected here via a 2 pos COMBICON connector Supply voltage connection The supply voltage can be connected redundantly via the 4 pos COMBICON connector as an option Slotfor MEM PLUG 1 22 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 16 Mounting and installation 2 Mounting and installation 2 1 Mounting and removing the MMS head station or MCS NOTE Always switch off the supply voltage when mounting removing the head station MCS and extension modules Mount the head station MCS on a clean DIN rail according to DIN EN 50 022 e g NS 35 from Phoenix Contact To avoid contact resistance only use clean corrosion free DIN rails Before mounting the modules an end clamp E NS 35N Order No 08 00 88 6 should be mounted on the left hand side next to the head station MCS to stop the modules from slipping on the DIN rail The supplied ATP ST TWIN side cover see A in F
301. ues between 4 7 in the priority field are transmitted via the Switch with high priority In addition the switch enables port based prioritization of data streams 3 4 4 1 VLAN prioritization tag The MMS MCS processes incoming data packets with regard to the prioritization information contained in the Ethernet packet VLAN prioritization tag The tag enables the specification of a priority level from 0 to 7 which the switch assigns to one of its two internal queues By default upon delivery the packets with priorities from 0 to 3 are treated as low priority packets whereas packets with priorities from 4 to 7 are high priority Ethernet packets The assignment of priority levels for both internal priority levels of the MMS can be modified via the dot1dTrafficClassTable of the P bridge MIB Processing rules The switch controller in the MMS MCS forwards received packets to of the receive queues according to the following decisions BPDU packets Spanning Tree LLDP and IGMP packets are always assigned to the high priority queue Packets with unknown unicast addresses are always assigned to the low priority queue Packets are assigned to the high priority queue if the priority from the VLAN priority tag is mapped to the high level default priority 4 to 7 internal port priority high results in priority level 7 handling i e the basic settings for data packet assignment to the high priority
302. um 14 dBm 50 125 um 14 dBm 62 5 125 um 20 5 dBm 50 125 um 17 dBm 62 5 125 um 11 dBm 50 125 um 11 dBm 62 5 125 um 31 dBm dynamic 28 dBm static 14 dBm dynamic 11 dBm static 100 Mbps 24V DC 100 mA maximum 100m 12 6 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 16 Technical data and ordering data Mechanical tests Shock test according to IEC 60068 2 27 Vibration resistance according to IEC 60068 2 6 Free fall according to IEC 60068 2 32 Conformance with EMC directives Noise emission according to EN 5501 1 Radio interference field strengths according to EN 55022 Electrostatic discharge ESD according to EN 61000 4 2 Electromagnetic fields according to IEC 61000 4 3 Conducted interference according to IEC 61000 4 6 Fast transients burst according to IEC 61000 4 4 Surge voltages according to IEC 61000 4 5 Operation 25g 11 ms period half sine shock pulse Storage transport 50g 11 ms period half sine shock pulse Operation storage transport 5g 10 150 Hz Criterion 3 1m Class A Class A Class 3 Criterion 10 V m Criterion A 10 Vrms Criterion A Data lines 1 kV Criterion A Power supply lines 2 2 kV Criterion A Data lines x1 kV asymmetrical Criterion B Power supply lines 0 5 kV symmetrical asymmetrical Criterion B 12 1 3 Revision history of this manual Differences between this version and previous versions Version 01 Spanning Tree section added FL IF 2
303. ve configuration can be saved permanently by selecting Save current configuration on the Configuration Management web page After entering a new group in the Multicast Group Address field add the ports of the group members by selecting the corresponding checkboxes Confirm by entering your password and clicking on Apply 6874_en_16 PHOENIX CONTACT 7 3 FL SWITCH MM HS Modifying assignment Checking group assignment Incorrect format Select the corresponding group in the Select Group list box to modify or delete the port assignment The group members are indicated by activated checkboxes and can be modified if required An action is completed by entering a password and clicking on Apply or Delete Static Multicast Groups vid 0001 group 01 00 5 00 1 8 08 vid 0001 group 01 00 5 00 19 21 vid 0003 group 01 00 5e 00 18 2d group D1 00 5e 00 a8 a8 Select Group VLAN ID 77 Multicast Group Address 01 00 5 00 8 8 Ports 1 8 E NEN Ports 9 16 Please enter the MAC address of a multicast group the format 30030900 C XC The address of an IP Multicast Group can an IP address in dotted format in the range from 224 0 0 0 to 239 255 255 255 MAC address in the range from 01 00 5 00 00 00 up to 01 00 5E 7F FF FF separated by colons A multicast address will be translated into a multicast MAC
304. ware for the head station MEM plug support Hardware Version 2 4 includes system bus Version 4 2 1 4 3 Dimensions of the MCS FL SWITCH 5 16 Ord 28 32 700 CYYXd BE PGI 12345678 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 OUR 5 BENIN 70582003 214 8 43 7 71 2 795 in Address 0 45 1 02 10 x18 US1 GND US2 GND Ri R2 95 3 74 10 mm 0 39 in Figure 1 12 Housing dimensions of the MCS in millimeters inches depth 71 mm from upper edge DIN rail 6874 en 16 PHOENIX CONTACT 1 21 FL SWITCH MM HS 1 4 4 Device view MCS 1 4 4 1 Front view operating elements slots for the MCS Diagnostic status Function switch indicators for LEDs Labeling field d n3 1 3 5 7 9 n 13 15 crake wero Baio CX EX MAC address Q iy ee 2122 70562003 soda V Supply voltage Alarm Ethernet ports Mini DIN V 24 connection contact E RS 232 FL MEM PLUG 2891259 Figure 1 13 Front view operating elements slots for the MCS Diagnostic status indicators Important information is displayed directly on the device Each port has two LEDs The
305. wer Supply Disable Enable i EE by Mac C Disable FIL R STP Ring Failure Disable Enable 5 New Root Disable 4 Enable R STP Topology changed Disable Enable Cold Start Disable Enable Warm Start Disable Enable Link Down Disable Enable Link Up Disable Enable PoE Port Status Disable Enable POF SCRJ Port Status Disable Enable MRP Ring Failure Disable Enable Enter password Apply SNMP Trap Connection Test For a test of the connection between this snmp agent and a network management too you have to configure the target ip address for the trap and sending traps must be enabled Then you can send a the trap trapManagerConnection with the snmp object id 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 3 0 99 see FL SWITCH M MIB from this device to a trap receiver using the button below Enter password Execute Figure 4 17 SNMP Configuration web page Trap Destination This part of the table is used to view or modify the IP addresses of the two trap receivers 6874 en 16 PHOENIX CONTACT 4 15 FL SWITCH HS Trap Configuration SNMP Trap Connection Test The send traps function can be disabled individually here Once the send traps function has been activated and the trap manager has been defined using the IP addresses test traps can now be sent using Execute to test the communication pa
306. without changes S2 Reset to default settings S3 Set PROFINET mode S4 Set Ethernet IP mode In the event of an error Display Meaning Remedy 16 The device software firmware is Update the firmware via the serial interface faulty 17 Firmware transfer via TFTP or Check the physical connection Xmodem failed display changes Establish a point to point connection from 03 to 17 Make sure that the file with the specified file name exists and is in the correct directory Check the IP address of the TFTP server Activate the TFTP server Repeat the download 19 File transfer was completed suc Provide a valid firmware version with the previously specified cessfully but the file is not a valid file name firmware version for the Modular Internet www phoenixcontact com Managed Switch System Repeat the download 80 An error has occurred the firm Restart the device power up or reset ware Makesure that the IP address is not used more than once in the same network 87 More than one parameterization Remove all but one of the memory modules and execute memory has been plugged in reset 89 The switch is or was in an excep Restartthe device tional situation Check your network for configuration errors loops loose contacts poor line quality faulty network interfaces sure that there are no Denial of Service attacks Li Link monitoring has detected at C
307. work VLAN Transparent Tagging GVRP protocol 8 3 General VLAN configuration Basic settings for VLAN operation can be made on the Switch Station VLAN General VLAN Configuration web page In Transparent mode the switch processes the incoming data packets as described in the Frame Switching section see Section 3 4 on page 3 31 Neither the structure nor the contents of the data packets is changed The information about VLAN assignment from a tag that may be contained in the data packet is ignored In Tagging mode incoming packets are received according to the specified VLAN rules a VLAN tag is added if required and the packet is then processed by the switch and the management level according to the information in the tag When transmitting Ethernet packets the switch observes the rules for the relevant VLAN or the relevant output port The management VLAN ID specifies in which VLAN the switch can be accessed if it is operating in Tagging VLAN mode General VLAN Configuration Current Tagging Status The switch is in the mode VLAN Transparent VLAN Tagging 6 Transparent Tagging The modified adjustments become effective after saving the configuration and rebooting the device Maximal number of YLANs 32 Configured VLANs 1 Current GVRP Status The GVRP is not active GVRP 6 Disable C Enable Enter password Apply Figure 8 1 General VLAN
308. write This object can be used to set the link down indication for the ports via the alarm contact Monitoring disabled 1 Monitoring enabled 2 The flWorkNetPortLinkMonitoring object can be used to set port monitoring individually for each port fIWorkFWCtrlAlarmContactEventSecurityPortBlocked 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 7 1 3 Integer Read and write Indication via the alarm contact if a disabled MAC address accesses a port Not activated 1 Activated 2 fIWorkFWCtrlAlarmContactEventPoEFaultDetected 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 7 1 4 Integer Read and write Indication via the alarm contact if a PoE fault has occurred Indication via the alarm contact not activated 1 Indication via the alarm contact activated 2 flWorkFWCtrlAlarmContactEnable 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 7 2 Integer Read and write This object can be used to set the indication for the configured states via the alarm contact Monitoring disabled 1 Monitoring enabled 2 4 104 PHOENIX CONTACT 6874 en 16 Configuration and diagnostics flWorkFWCtrlAlarmContactStatus OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 7 3 Syntax Integer Access Read Description This object can be used to request the status of the alarm contact Alarm contact open 1 Alarm contact closed 2 flWorkFWCtrlAlarmContactReason OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 11 2 7 4 Syntax Display string Access Read Description Indicates the reason why the alarm contact was opened flWorkF
309. x RR 3 21 3 3 8 FL IF MEM 2TX D FL IF MEM 2TX D MRM enne 3 23 3 3 9 2 e e Ue E De ore orders e pe 3 24 3 310 EEIE2POE SCRUJ D uiti rettet erecto tct ert 3 28 3 4 Frame Switching sien A a e HEU RO is E 3 31 3 4 1 Store and forward 3 31 3 4 2 Multi address function 3 31 3 4 3 Learning addresses 3 31 3 4 4 PfioritiZatlon iei 3 32 4 Configuration and diagnostics 4 1 4 1 Factory Manager toi imer oth tp D iR ER 4 1 4 1 1 General fUNCHON wits ii e i e Pt den d ER dete 4 1 4 1 2 Assigning IP parameters 4 1 4 1 3 Configuration and diagnostics sese 4 3 4 2 Web based management WBM sese 4 10 4 2 1 General function eet eine re ee 4 10 4 2 2 Requirements for the use of WBM 4 11 4 2 3 Functions information in WBM sse 4 12 4 3 Simple Network Management Protocol 4 44 4 3 1 Generalfunctior edet ten 4 44 4 3 2 Diagram of SNMP management 4 47 4 3 3 RFC1213 MIB 4 49 4 3 4 RMON 1 3 6 1 2 1
310. y possible to connect a Telnet client and Telnet server The Telnet server appears to the client as a locally connected terminal 4 5 1 Configuring the Telnet terminal For a Telnet connection to be established between the PC and the MMS MCS the IP parameters of both devices must be adjusted so that they are in the same subnetwork Establishing the Telnet connection Connect the PC and the switch to an Ethernet network From the Start menu select the Run option Enter the following command and the IP address of the MMS MCS Click OK to establish the connection with the switch 02 Internet resource and Windows will open it For you 71 Type the name of program Folder document or Open telnet 192 168 2 100 Cancel Browse Figure 4 60 Establishing the Telnet connection 4 5 2 Telnet interface functions The following functions are available in the Telnet interface Setting IP parameters Selecting the addressing mechanism Reset to default settings Activating deactivating the web server the Telnet function and SNMP Activating deactivating port security access control for web Switching the VLAN mode Switching the operating mode Activating deactivating the RSTP redundancy mechanism Reset All settings are transferred using APPLY but are not saved permanently Use the SAVE function to save the active configuration settings permanently
311. y voltage 1 Temperature too high 2 Current limitation activated 3 Load disconnected 4 The PoE controller does not respond 48 V supply be missing 5 No PoE interface module inserted in this slot 6 The switch does not support PoE interface modules 7 No PoE devices connected to this port 8 flWorkNetPortPoEFaultMonitoring OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 2 3 1 8 Syntax Integer Access Read and write Description This object can be used to enable PoE fault monitoring message via display and alarm contact for the relevant port Fault monitoring enabled 2 Fault monitoring disabled 1 6874 en 16 PHOENIX CONTACT 4 85 FL SWITCH HS flWorkNetPofScrjlfGroup OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 2 4 flWorkNetPortPofScrjlfTable OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 2 4 Description Generates a table with a detailed description of the POF SCRJ port properties flWorkNetPortPofScrjlflndex OID Syntax Access Description 1 3 6 1 4 1 4846 11 11 4 2 4 1 1 Integer32 1 1024 Read Specifies the port number of the selected port flWorkNetPortPofScrjlfStatus OID Syntax Access Description 1 3 6 1 4 1 4346 11 11 4 2 4 1 2 Integer Read Indicates the status of the port in relation to the POF SCRJ function The hardware does not support POF SCRJ diagnostics No POF SCRJU interface module at this port The system reserve at this port is greater than 2 dB The system reserve is less than 2 dB but greater than 0 dB No system

User manual FL SWITCH MM HS UM E for

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents